[x86] Resolve non-PIC undefweak symbols in executable
[binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
1 \input texinfo
2 @setfilename ld.info
3 @c Copyright (C) 1991-2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
4 @syncodeindex ky cp
5 @c man begin INCLUDE
6 @include configdoc.texi
7 @c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
8 @include bfdver.texi
9 @c man end
10
11 @c @smallbook
12
13 @macro gcctabopt{body}
14 @code{\body\}
15 @end macro
16
17 @c man begin NAME
18 @ifset man
19 @c Configure for the generation of man pages
20 @set UsesEnvVars
21 @set GENERIC
22 @set ARM
23 @set C6X
24 @set H8300
25 @set HPPA
26 @set I960
27 @set M68HC11
28 @set M68K
29 @set MIPS
30 @set MMIX
31 @set MSP430
32 @set NDS32
33 @set NIOSII
34 @set POWERPC
35 @set POWERPC64
36 @set Renesas
37 @set SPU
38 @set TICOFF
39 @set WIN32
40 @set XTENSA
41 @end ifset
42 @c man end
43
44 @ifnottex
45 @dircategory Software development
46 @direntry
47 * Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
48 @end direntry
49 @end ifnottex
50
51 @copying
52 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
53 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
54 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
55 @end ifset
56 version @value{VERSION}.
57
58 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
59
60 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
61 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
62 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
65 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
66 @end copying
67 @iftex
68 @finalout
69 @setchapternewpage odd
70 @settitle The GNU linker
71 @titlepage
72 @title The GNU linker
73 @sp 1
74 @subtitle @code{ld}
75 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77 @end ifset
78 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79 @author Steve Chamberlain
80 @author Ian Lance Taylor
81 @page
82
83 @tex
84 {\parskip=0pt
85 \hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86 \hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
87 \hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
88 \hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89 }
90 \global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91 @end tex
92
93 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
94 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
95 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
96
97 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
98 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
99 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
100 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
101 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
102 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
103 @c man end
104
105 @end titlepage
106 @end iftex
107 @contents
108 @c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
109
110 @ifnottex
111 @node Top
112 @top LD
113 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
114 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
115 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
116 @end ifset
117 version @value{VERSION}.
118
119 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
120 Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
121 in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
122
123 @menu
124 * Overview:: Overview
125 * Invocation:: Invocation
126 * Scripts:: Linker Scripts
127 @ifset GENERIC
128 * Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
129 @end ifset
130 @ifclear GENERIC
131 @ifset H8300
132 * H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
133 @end ifset
134 @ifset Renesas
135 * Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
136 @end ifset
137 @ifset I960
138 * i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
139 @end ifset
140 @ifset ARM
141 * ARM:: ld and the ARM family
142 @end ifset
143 @ifset M68HC11
144 * M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
145 @end ifset
146 @ifset HPPA
147 * HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
148 @end ifset
149 @ifset M68K
150 * M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
151 @end ifset
152 @ifset MIPS
153 * MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
154 @end ifset
155 @ifset POWERPC
156 * PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
157 @end ifset
158 @ifset POWERPC64
159 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
160 @end ifset
161 @ifset SPU
162 * SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
163 @end ifset
164 @ifset TICOFF
165 * TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
166 @end ifset
167 @ifset WIN32
168 * Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
169 @end ifset
170 @ifset XTENSA
171 * Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
172 @end ifset
173 @end ifclear
174 @ifclear SingleFormat
175 * BFD:: BFD
176 @end ifclear
177 @c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
178
179 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
180 * MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
181 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
182 * LD Index:: LD Index
183 @end menu
184 @end ifnottex
185
186 @node Overview
187 @chapter Overview
188
189 @cindex @sc{gnu} linker
190 @cindex what is this?
191
192 @ifset man
193 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
194 ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
195 @c man end
196
197 @c man begin SEEALSO
198 ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
199 the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
200 @file{ld}.
201 @c man end
202 @end ifset
203
204 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
205
206 @command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
207 their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
208 compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
209
210 @command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
211 a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
212 to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
213
214 @ifset man
215 @c For the man only
216 This man page does not describe the command language; see the
217 @command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
218 language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
219 @end ifset
220
221 @ifclear SingleFormat
222 This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
223 to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
224 write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
225 @code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
226 available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
227 @end ifclear
228
229 Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
230 linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
231 execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
232 @command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
233 (or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
234
235 @c man end
236
237 @node Invocation
238 @chapter Invocation
239
240 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
241
242 The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
243 and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
244 you have many choices to control its behavior.
245
246 @c man end
247
248 @ifset UsesEnvVars
249 @menu
250 * Options:: Command Line Options
251 * Environment:: Environment Variables
252 @end menu
253
254 @node Options
255 @section Command Line Options
256 @end ifset
257
258 @cindex command line
259 @cindex options
260
261 @c man begin OPTIONS
262
263 The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
264 practice few of them are used in any particular context.
265 @cindex standard Unix system
266 For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
267 object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
268 link a file @code{hello.o}:
269
270 @smallexample
271 ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
272 @end smallexample
273
274 This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
275 result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
276 the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
277 directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
278
279 Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
280 point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
281 as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
282 which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
283 files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
284 different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
285 occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
286 option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
287 noted in the descriptions below.
288
289 @cindex object files
290 Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
291 together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
292 options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
293 an option and its argument.
294
295 Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
296 specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
297 and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
298 are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
299 message @samp{No input files}.
300
301 If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
302 assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
303 augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
304 linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
305 permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
306 or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
307 @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
308 script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
309 extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
310 to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
311 the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
312
313 For options whose names are a single letter,
314 option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
315 whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
316 option that requires them.
317
318 For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
319 precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
320 @samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
321 this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
322 only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
323 @samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
324 name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
325 output.
326
327 Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
328 option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
329 immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
330 @samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
331 Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
332 accepted.
333
334 Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
335 (e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
336 prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
337 compiler driver) like this:
338
339 @smallexample
340 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
341 @end smallexample
342
343 This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
344 silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
345 may also arise when passing options that require values through a
346 driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
347 a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
348 and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
349 the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
350
351 @smallexample
352 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
353 @end smallexample
354
355 Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
356 linker:
357
358 @table @gcctabopt
359 @include at-file.texi
360
361 @kindex -a @var{keyword}
362 @item -a @var{keyword}
363 This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
364 argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
365 @samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
366 @samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
367 to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
368
369 @kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
370 @item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
372 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
373 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
374 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
375 finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
376 it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
377 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
378 interface.
379
380 @ifset I960
381 @cindex architectures
382 @kindex -A @var{arch}
383 @item -A @var{architecture}
384 @kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
385 @itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
386 In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
387 Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
388 @var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
389 the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
390 archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
391 family}, for details.
392
393 Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
394 other architecture families.
395 @end ifset
396
397 @ifclear SingleFormat
398 @cindex binary input format
399 @kindex -b @var{format}
400 @kindex --format=@var{format}
401 @cindex input format
402 @cindex input format
403 @item -b @var{input-format}
404 @itemx --format=@var{input-format}
405 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
406 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
407 @samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
408 that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
409 configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
410 to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
411 default input format the most usual format on each machine.
412 @var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
413 supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
414 formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
415 @xref{BFD}.
416
417 You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
418 binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
419 linking object files of different formats), by including
420 @samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
421 particular format.
422
423 The default format is taken from the environment variable
424 @code{GNUTARGET}.
425 @ifset UsesEnvVars
426 @xref{Environment}.
427 @end ifset
428 You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
429 @code{TARGET};
430 @ifclear man
431 see @ref{Format Commands}.
432 @end ifclear
433 @end ifclear
434
435 @kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
436 @kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
437 @cindex compatibility, MRI
438 @item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
439 @itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
440 For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
441 files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
442 @ifclear man
443 @ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
444 @end ifclear
445 @ifset man
446 the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
447 @end ifset
448 Introduce MRI script files with
449 the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
450 scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
451 If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
452 specified by any @samp{-L} options.
453
454 @cindex common allocation
455 @kindex -d
456 @kindex -dc
457 @kindex -dp
458 @item -d
459 @itemx -dc
460 @itemx -dp
461 These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
462 compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
463 even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
464 script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
465 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
466
467 @kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
468 @kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
469 @item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
470 @itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
471 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
472 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
473 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
474 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
475 option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
476 The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
477
478 @cindex entry point, from command line
479 @kindex -e @var{entry}
480 @kindex --entry=@var{entry}
481 @item -e @var{entry}
482 @itemx --entry=@var{entry}
483 Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
484 program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
485 named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
486 and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
487 base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
488 @samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
489 and other ways of specifying the entry point.
490
491 @kindex --exclude-libs
492 @item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
493 Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
494 exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
495 @code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
496 automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
497 port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
498 explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
499 option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
500 be treated as hidden.
501
502 @kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
503 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
504 Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
505 should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
506 into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
507 may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
508 used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
509 the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
510 match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
511 command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
512 of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
513 regardless of this option.
514
515 @cindex dynamic symbol table
516 @kindex -E
517 @kindex --export-dynamic
518 @kindex --no-export-dynamic
519 @item -E
520 @itemx --export-dynamic
521 @itemx --no-export-dynamic
522 When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
523 option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
524 all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
525 set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
526
527 If you do not use either of these options (or use the
528 @option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
529 dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
530 referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
531
532 If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
533 back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
534 dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
535 linking the program itself.
536
537 You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
538 be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
539 See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
540
541 Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
542 support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
543 the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
544
545 @ifclear SingleFormat
546 @cindex big-endian objects
547 @cindex endianness
548 @kindex -EB
549 @item -EB
550 Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
551
552 @cindex little-endian objects
553 @kindex -EL
554 @item -EL
555 Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
556 @end ifclear
557
558 @kindex -f @var{name}
559 @kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
560 @item -f @var{name}
561 @itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
562 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
563 to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
564 table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
565 symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
566
567 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
568 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
569 the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
570 first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
571 @var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
572 in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
573 Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
574 implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
575 machine specific performance.
576
577 This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
578 will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
579
580 @kindex -F @var{name}
581 @kindex --filter=@var{name}
582 @item -F @var{name}
583 @itemx --filter=@var{name}
584 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
585 the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
586 of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
587 on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
588
589 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
590 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
591 dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
592 filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
593 found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
594 used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
595 @var{name}.
596
597 Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
598 toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
599 object files.
600 @ifclear SingleFormat
601 The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
602 @option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
603 @code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
604 environment variable.
605 @end ifclear
606 The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
607 creating an ELF shared object.
608
609 @cindex finalization function
610 @kindex -fini=@var{name}
611 @item -fini=@var{name}
612 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
613 executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
614 address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
615 the function to call.
616
617 @kindex -g
618 @item -g
619 Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
620
621 @kindex -G @var{value}
622 @kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
623 @cindex object size
624 @item -G @var{value}
625 @itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
626 Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
627 @var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
628 MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
629 sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
630
631 @cindex runtime library name
632 @kindex -h @var{name}
633 @kindex -soname=@var{name}
634 @item -h @var{name}
635 @itemx -soname=@var{name}
636 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
637 the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
638 which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
639 linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
640 field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
641
642 @kindex -i
643 @cindex incremental link
644 @item -i
645 Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
646
647 @cindex initialization function
648 @kindex -init=@var{name}
649 @item -init=@var{name}
650 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
651 executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
652 of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
653 function to call.
654
655 @cindex archive files, from cmd line
656 @kindex -l @var{namespec}
657 @kindex --library=@var{namespec}
658 @item -l @var{namespec}
659 @itemx --library=@var{namespec}
660 Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
661 list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
662 If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
663 will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
664 will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
665
666 On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
667 files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
668 and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
669 called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
670 @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
671 indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
672 to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
673 @var{filename}.
674
675 The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
676 specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
677 was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
678 command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
679 archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
680 the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
681
682 See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
683 archives multiple times.
684
685 You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
686
687 @ifset GENERIC
688 This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
689 if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
690 behaviour of the AIX linker.
691 @end ifset
692
693 @cindex search directory, from cmd line
694 @kindex -L @var{dir}
695 @kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
696 @item -L @var{searchdir}
697 @itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
698 Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
699 for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
700 option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
701 in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
702 on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
703 @option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
704 order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
705 how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
706 option is specified.
707
708 If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
709 by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the @samp{--sysroot} option, or
710 specified when the linker is configured.
711
712 @ifset UsesEnvVars
713 The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
714 @samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
715 some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
716 @end ifset
717
718 The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
719 @code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
720 at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
721
722 @cindex emulation
723 @kindex -m @var{emulation}
724 @item -m @var{emulation}
725 Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
726 emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
727
728 If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
729 @code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
730
731 Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
732 configured.
733
734 @cindex link map
735 @kindex -M
736 @kindex --print-map
737 @item -M
738 @itemx --print-map
739 Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
740 information about the link, including the following:
741
742 @itemize @bullet
743 @item
744 Where object files are mapped into memory.
745 @item
746 How common symbols are allocated.
747 @item
748 All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
749 which caused the archive member to be brought in.
750 @item
751 The values assigned to symbols.
752
753 Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
754 involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
755 have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
756 linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
757 of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
758 the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
759 linker script containing:
760
761 @smallexample
762 foo = 1
763 foo = foo * 4
764 foo = foo + 8
765 @end smallexample
766
767 will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
768 option is used:
769
770 @smallexample
771 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
772 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
773 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
774 @end smallexample
775
776 See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
777 scripts.
778 @end itemize
779
780 @kindex -n
781 @cindex read-only text
782 @cindex NMAGIC
783 @kindex --nmagic
784 @item -n
785 @itemx --nmagic
786 Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
787 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
788 mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
789
790 @kindex -N
791 @kindex --omagic
792 @cindex read/write from cmd line
793 @cindex OMAGIC
794 @item -N
795 @itemx --omagic
796 Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
797 not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
798 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
799 mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
800 is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
801 specification published by Microsoft.
802
803 @kindex --no-omagic
804 @cindex OMAGIC
805 @item --no-omagic
806 This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
807 sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
808 be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
809 shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
810
811 @kindex -o @var{output}
812 @kindex --output=@var{output}
813 @cindex naming the output file
814 @item -o @var{output}
815 @itemx --output=@var{output}
816 Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
817 option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
818 script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
819
820 @kindex -O @var{level}
821 @cindex generating optimized output
822 @item -O @var{level}
823 If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
824 the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
825 should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
826 option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
827 the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
828 no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
829 of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
830
831 @kindex --push-state
832 @cindex push state governing input file handling
833 @item --push-state
834 The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
835 flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
836 restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
837
838 The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
839 @option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
840 @option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
841 @option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
842 @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
843 @option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
844
845 One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
846 used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
847 listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
848 something as follows:
849
850 @smallexample
851 -Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
852 @end smallexample
853
854 @kindex --pop-state
855 @cindex pop state governing input file handling
856 Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
857 flags governing input file handling.
858
859 @kindex -q
860 @kindex --emit-relocs
861 @cindex retain relocations in final executable
862 @item -q
863 @itemx --emit-relocs
864 Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
865 Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
866 order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
867 in larger executables.
868
869 This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
870
871 @kindex --force-dynamic
872 @cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
873 @item --force-dynamic
874 Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
875 to VxWorks targets.
876
877 @cindex partial link
878 @cindex relocatable output
879 @kindex -r
880 @kindex --relocatable
881 @item -r
882 @itemx --relocatable
883 Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
884 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
885 linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
886 magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
887 @code{OMAGIC}.
888 @c ; see @option{-N}.
889 If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
890 linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
891 constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
892
893 When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
894 partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
895 relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
896 example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
897 with input files in other formats at all.
898
899 This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
900
901 @kindex -R @var{file}
902 @kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
903 @cindex symbol-only input
904 @item -R @var{filename}
905 @itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
906 Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
907 relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
908 to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
909 programs. You may use this option more than once.
910
911 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
912 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
913 the @option{-rpath} option.
914
915 @kindex -s
916 @kindex --strip-all
917 @cindex strip all symbols
918 @item -s
919 @itemx --strip-all
920 Omit all symbol information from the output file.
921
922 @kindex -S
923 @kindex --strip-debug
924 @cindex strip debugger symbols
925 @item -S
926 @itemx --strip-debug
927 Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
928
929 @kindex -t
930 @kindex --trace
931 @cindex input files, displaying
932 @item -t
933 @itemx --trace
934 Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
935
936 @kindex -T @var{script}
937 @kindex --script=@var{script}
938 @cindex script files
939 @item -T @var{scriptfile}
940 @itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
941 Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
942 @command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
943 @var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
944 output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
945 the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
946 specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
947 options accumulate.
948
949 @kindex -dT @var{script}
950 @kindex --default-script=@var{script}
951 @cindex script files
952 @item -dT @var{scriptfile}
953 @itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
954 Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
955
956 This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
957 processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
958 command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
959 @option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
960 behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
961 command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
962 the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
963 @samp{gcc}).
964
965 @kindex -u @var{symbol}
966 @kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
967 @cindex undefined symbol
968 @item -u @var{symbol}
969 @itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
970 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
971 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
972 modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
973 different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
974 option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
975
976 If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
977 into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
978 undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
979 instead.
980
981 @kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
982 @cindex symbols, require defined
983 @cindex defined symbol
984 @item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
985 Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file. This option
986 is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
987 is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
988 and exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
989 @code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together. This option
990 can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
991
992 @kindex -Ur
993 @cindex constructors
994 @item -Ur
995 For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
996 @samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
997 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
998 @emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
999 It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
1000 with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
1001 be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
1002 @samp{-r} for the others.
1003
1004 @kindex --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1005 @cindex orphan sections
1006 @cindex sections, orphan
1007 @item --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1008 Control how orphan sections are handled. An orphan section is one not
1009 specifically mentioned in a linker script. @xref{Orphan Sections}.
1010
1011 @var{MODE} can have any of the following values:
1012
1013 @table @code
1014 @item place
1015 Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section following
1016 the strategy described in @ref{Orphan Sections}. The option
1017 @samp{--unique} also effects how sections are placed.
1018
1019 @item discard
1020 All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
1021 @samp{/DISCARD/} section (@pxref{Output Section Discarding}).
1022
1023 @item warn
1024 The linker will place the orphan section as for @code{place} and also
1025 issue a warning.
1026
1027 @item error
1028 The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is found.
1029 @end table
1030
1031 The default if @samp{--orphan-handling} is not given is @code{place}.
1032
1033 @kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1034 @item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1035 Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
1036 @var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
1037 missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
1038 specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
1039 multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
1040 input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
1041 in a linker script.
1042
1043 @kindex -v
1044 @kindex -V
1045 @kindex --version
1046 @cindex version
1047 @item -v
1048 @itemx --version
1049 @itemx -V
1050 Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
1051 lists the supported emulations.
1052
1053 @kindex -x
1054 @kindex --discard-all
1055 @cindex deleting local symbols
1056 @item -x
1057 @itemx --discard-all
1058 Delete all local symbols.
1059
1060 @kindex -X
1061 @kindex --discard-locals
1062 @cindex local symbols, deleting
1063 @item -X
1064 @itemx --discard-locals
1065 Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1066 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1067 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
1068
1069 @kindex -y @var{symbol}
1070 @kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1071 @cindex symbol tracing
1072 @item -y @var{symbol}
1073 @itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1074 Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1075 option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1076 to prepend an underscore.
1077
1078 This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1079 don't know where the reference is coming from.
1080
1081 @kindex -Y @var{path}
1082 @item -Y @var{path}
1083 Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1084 for Solaris compatibility.
1085
1086 @kindex -z @var{keyword}
1087 @item -z @var{keyword}
1088 The recognized keywords are:
1089 @table @samp
1090
1091 @item combreloc
1092 Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1093 lookup caching possible.
1094
1095 @item defs
1096 Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
1097 shared libraries are still allowed.
1098
1099 @item execstack
1100 Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1101
1102 @item global
1103 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1104 the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1105 of subsequently loaded libraries.
1106
1107 @item initfirst
1108 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1109 It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1110 before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1111 the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1112 the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1113 objects.
1114
1115 @item interpose
1116 Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1117 but the primary executable.
1118
1119 @item lazy
1120 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1121 dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1122 the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1123 Lazy binding is the default.
1124
1125 @item loadfltr
1126 Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1127 runtime.
1128
1129 @item muldefs
1130 Allows multiple definitions.
1131
1132 @item nocombreloc
1133 Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1134
1135 @item nocopyreloc
1136 Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1137 defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
1138
1139 @item nodefaultlib
1140 Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1141 ignore any default library search paths.
1142
1143 @item nodelete
1144 Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1145
1146 @item nodlopen
1147 Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1148
1149 @item nodump
1150 Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1151
1152 @item noexecstack
1153 Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1154
1155 @item text
1156 Treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1157
1158 @item notext
1159 Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1160
1161 @item textoff
1162 Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1163
1164 @item norelro
1165 Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1166
1167 @item now
1168 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1169 dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1170 when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1171 deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1172 first called.
1173
1174 @item origin
1175 Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1176
1177 @item relro
1178 Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1179
1180 @item max-page-size=@var{value}
1181 Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1182
1183 @item common-page-size=@var{value}
1184 Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1185
1186 @item stack-size=@var{value}
1187 Specify a stack size for in an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1188 Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1189 @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1190
1191 @item bndplt
1192 Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1193
1194 @item noextern-protected-data
1195 Don't treat protected data symbol as external when building shared
1196 library. This option overrides linker backend default. It can be used
1197 to workaround incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1198 generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
1199 module aren't visible to the resulting shared library. Supported for
1200 i386 and x86-64.
1201
1202 @item nodynamic-undefined-weak
1203 Don't treat undefined weak symbols as dynamic when building executable.
1204 This option overrides linker backend default. It can be used to avoid
1205 dynamic relocations against undefined weak symbols in executable.
1206 Supported for i386 and x86-64.
1207
1208 @item call-nop=prefix-addr
1209 @itemx call-nop=prefix-nop
1210 @itemx call-nop=suffix-nop
1211 @itemx call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}
1212 @itemx call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}
1213 Specify the 1-byte @code{NOP} padding when transforming indirect call
1214 to a locally defined function, foo, via its GOT slot.
1215 @option{call-nop=prefix-addr} generates @code{0x67 call foo}.
1216 @option{call-nop=prefix-nop} generates @code{0x90 call foo}.
1217 @option{call-nop=suffix-nop} generates @code{call foo 0x90}.
1218 @option{call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}} generates @code{@var{byte} call foo}.
1219 @option{call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}} generates @code{call foo @var{byte}}.
1220 Supported for i386 and x86_64.
1221
1222 @end table
1223
1224 Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
1225
1226 @kindex -(
1227 @cindex groups of archives
1228 @item -( @var{archives} -)
1229 @itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1230 The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1231 either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1232
1233 The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1234 references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1235 the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1236 archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1237 object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1238 would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1239 they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1240 resolved.
1241
1242 Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1243 it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1244 more archives.
1245
1246 @kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1247 @kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1248 @item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1249 @itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1250 Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
1251 recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
1252 and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1253 the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1254 behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1255 so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1256 restore the old behaviour.
1257
1258 @kindex --as-needed
1259 @kindex --no-as-needed
1260 @item --as-needed
1261 @itemx --no-as-needed
1262 This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
1263 on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
1264 the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1265 on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
1266 needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
1267 emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1268 non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1269 the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1270 non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
1271 Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1272 the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1273 needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1274 from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1275
1276 @kindex --add-needed
1277 @kindex --no-add-needed
1278 @item --add-needed
1279 @itemx --no-add-needed
1280 These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1281 their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1282 options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1283 and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1284
1285 @kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1286 @item -assert @var{keyword}
1287 This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1288
1289 @kindex -Bdynamic
1290 @kindex -dy
1291 @kindex -call_shared
1292 @item -Bdynamic
1293 @itemx -dy
1294 @itemx -call_shared
1295 Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1296 for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1297 default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1298 for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1299 multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
1300 @option{-l} options which follow it.
1301
1302 @kindex -Bgroup
1303 @item -Bgroup
1304 Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1305 section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1306 object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
1307 @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1308 only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
1309
1310 @kindex -Bstatic
1311 @kindex -dn
1312 @kindex -non_shared
1313 @kindex -static
1314 @item -Bstatic
1315 @itemx -dn
1316 @itemx -non_shared
1317 @itemx -static
1318 Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1319 platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1320 variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1321 may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
1322 library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
1323 option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1324 option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1325 shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1326 references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
1327 libraries.
1328
1329 @kindex -Bsymbolic
1330 @item -Bsymbolic
1331 When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1332 definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1333 for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1334 within the shared library. This option can also be used with the
1335 @option{--export-dynamic} option, when creating a position independent
1336 executable, to bind references to global symbols to the definition within
1337 the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which
1338 support shared libraries and position independent executables.
1339
1340 @kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1341 @item -Bsymbolic-functions
1342 When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
1343 symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
1344 This option can also be used with the @option{--export-dynamic} option,
1345 when creating a position independent executable, to bind references
1346 to global function symbols to the definition within the executable.
1347 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1348 libraries and position independent executables.
1349
1350 @kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1351 @item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1352 Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1353 typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1354 global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1355 within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1356 to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1357 in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1358 which support shared libraries.
1359
1360 The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1361 scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1362
1363 @kindex --dynamic-list-data
1364 @item --dynamic-list-data
1365 Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1366
1367 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1368 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1369 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1370 is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1371
1372 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1373 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1374 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1375
1376 @kindex --check-sections
1377 @kindex --no-check-sections
1378 @item --check-sections
1379 @itemx --no-check-sections
1380 Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
1381 been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
1382 perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1383 suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1384 allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
1385 restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
1386 Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1387 force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1388 option.
1389
1390 @kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1391 @kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1392 @item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1393 @itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1394 This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
1395 by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
1396 command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
1397 output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
1398 input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1399 specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
1400 follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1401 behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1402
1403 This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
1404 libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1405 mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1406 their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1407 required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1408 the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1409 dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
1410 symbols.
1411
1412 @cindex cross reference table
1413 @kindex --cref
1414 @item --cref
1415 Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1416 generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1417 Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1418
1419 The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1420 easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1421 sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1422 symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1423 definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1424 where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1425 symbol are listed.
1426
1427 @cindex common allocation
1428 @kindex --no-define-common
1429 @item --no-define-common
1430 This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1431 The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1432 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1433
1434 The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1435 the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1436 of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1437 forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1438 Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1439 from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1440 This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1441 and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1442 duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1443 paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1444
1445 @cindex symbols, from command line
1446 @kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1447 @item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
1448 Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1449 address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1450 times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1451 limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1452 context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1453 symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1454 constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1455 using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1456 @emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1457 equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
1458
1459 @cindex demangling, from command line
1460 @kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
1461 @kindex --no-demangle
1462 @item --demangle[=@var{style}]
1463 @itemx --no-demangle
1464 These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1465 and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1466 present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1467 underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
1468 mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1469 different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1470 to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
1471 demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1472 is set. These options may be used to override the default.
1473
1474 @cindex dynamic linker, from command line
1475 @kindex -I@var{file}
1476 @kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1477 @item -I@var{file}
1478 @itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1479 Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1480 generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1481 linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1482 doing.
1483
1484 @kindex --no-dynamic-linker
1485 @item --no-dynamic-linker
1486 When producing an executable file, omit the request for a dynamic
1487 linker to be used at load-time. This is only meaningful for ELF
1488 executables that contain dynamic relocations, and usually requires
1489 entry point code that is capable of processing these relocations.
1490
1491 @kindex --fatal-warnings
1492 @kindex --no-fatal-warnings
1493 @item --fatal-warnings
1494 @itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1495 Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1496 with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
1497
1498 @kindex --force-exe-suffix
1499 @item --force-exe-suffix
1500 Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1501
1502 If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1503 @code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1504 the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1505 option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1506 Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1507 it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1508
1509 @kindex --gc-sections
1510 @kindex --no-gc-sections
1511 @cindex garbage collection
1512 @item --gc-sections
1513 @itemx --no-gc-sections
1514 Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
1515 targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
1516 performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1517 @samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1518 collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1519 implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
1520
1521 @samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1522 examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1523 symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1524 command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1525 referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1526 libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1527 referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1528 the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1529 relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1530
1531 This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
1532 @samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
1533 specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1534 a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1535
1536 @kindex --print-gc-sections
1537 @kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1538 @cindex garbage collection
1539 @item --print-gc-sections
1540 @itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1541 List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1542 printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1543 collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1544 default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1545 be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1546 line.
1547
1548 @kindex --print-output-format
1549 @cindex output format
1550 @item --print-output-format
1551 Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1552 other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1553 in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1554
1555 @kindex --print-memory-usage
1556 @cindex memory usage
1557 @item --print-memory-usage
1558 Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1559 the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1560 quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1561 headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1562 parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1563
1564 @smallexample
1565 Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1566 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1567 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1568 @end smallexample
1569
1570 @cindex help
1571 @cindex usage
1572 @kindex --help
1573 @item --help
1574 Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1575
1576 @kindex --target-help
1577 @item --target-help
1578 Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1579
1580 @kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1581 @item -Map=@var{mapfile}
1582 Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
1583 @option{-M} option, above.
1584
1585 @cindex memory usage
1586 @kindex --no-keep-memory
1587 @item --no-keep-memory
1588 @command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1589 symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
1590 instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
1591 necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
1592 while linking a large executable.
1593
1594 @kindex --no-undefined
1595 @kindex -z defs
1596 @item --no-undefined
1597 @itemx -z defs
1598 Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1599 is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1600 The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1601 behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
1602 libraries being linked in.
1603
1604 @kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1605 @kindex -z muldefs
1606 @item --allow-multiple-definition
1607 @itemx -z muldefs
1608 Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1609 report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1610 first definition will be used.
1611
1612 @kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
1613 @kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1614 @item --allow-shlib-undefined
1615 @itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1616 Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
1617 This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1618 determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1619 shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1620 how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1621
1622 The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1623 referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1624 an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1625 a shared library.
1626
1627 The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1628 libraries specified at link time are that:
1629
1630 @itemize @bullet
1631 @item
1632 A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1633 that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1634 resolvable at load time.
1635 @item
1636 There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1637 symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1638
1639 The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1640 select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1641 architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1642 appropriate memset function.
1643 @end itemize
1644
1645 @kindex --no-undefined-version
1646 @item --no-undefined-version
1647 Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1648 it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1649 will be issued instead.
1650
1651 @kindex --default-symver
1652 @item --default-symver
1653 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1654 exported symbols.
1655
1656 @kindex --default-imported-symver
1657 @item --default-imported-symver
1658 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1659 imported symbols.
1660
1661 @kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1662 @item --no-warn-mismatch
1663 Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
1664 files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1665 been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
1666 This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
1667 errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1668 have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1669 inappropriate.
1670
1671 @kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1672 @item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1673 Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1674 library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1675
1676 @kindex --no-whole-archive
1677 @item --no-whole-archive
1678 Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
1679 archive files.
1680
1681 @cindex output file after errors
1682 @kindex --noinhibit-exec
1683 @item --noinhibit-exec
1684 Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1685 Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1686 errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1687 when it issues any error whatsoever.
1688
1689 @kindex -nostdlib
1690 @item -nostdlib
1691 Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1692 command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1693 (including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1694
1695 @ifclear SingleFormat
1696 @kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1697 @item --oformat=@var{output-format}
1698 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1699 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
1700 @samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
1701 object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1702 object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
1703 should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1704 usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1705 name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1706 list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1707 command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1708 this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1709 @end ifclear
1710
1711 @kindex -pie
1712 @kindex --pic-executable
1713 @item -pie
1714 @itemx --pic-executable
1715 @cindex position independent executables
1716 Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1717 ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1718 libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
1719 address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
1720 normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1721 defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1722
1723 @kindex -qmagic
1724 @item -qmagic
1725 This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1726
1727 @kindex -Qy
1728 @item -Qy
1729 This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1730
1731 @kindex --relax
1732 @cindex synthesizing linker
1733 @cindex relaxing addressing modes
1734 @cindex --no-relax
1735 @item --relax
1736 @itemx --no-relax
1737 An option with machine dependent effects.
1738 @ifset GENERIC
1739 This option is only supported on a few targets.
1740 @end ifset
1741 @ifset H8300
1742 @xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
1743 @end ifset
1744 @ifset I960
1745 @xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
1746 @end ifset
1747 @ifset XTENSA
1748 @xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1749 @end ifset
1750 @ifset M68HC11
1751 @xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1752 @end ifset
1753 @ifset NIOSII
1754 @xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1755 @end ifset
1756 @ifset POWERPC
1757 @xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1758 @end ifset
1759
1760 On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1761 global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1762 addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1763 synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
1764 instructions, and combining constant values.
1765
1766 On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1767 debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1768 @ifset GENERIC
1769 This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1770 family of processors.
1771 @end ifset
1772
1773 @ifset GENERIC
1774 On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1775 but ignored.
1776 @end ifset
1777
1778 On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1779 @samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1780
1781 @cindex retaining specified symbols
1782 @cindex stripping all but some symbols
1783 @cindex symbols, retaining selectively
1784 @kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1785 @item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1786 Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1787 discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1788 symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1789 @ifset GENERIC
1790 (such as VxWorks)
1791 @end ifset
1792 where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1793 run-time memory.
1794
1795 @samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1796 or symbols needed for relocations.
1797
1798 You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1799 line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1800
1801 @ifset GENERIC
1802 @item -rpath=@var{dir}
1803 @cindex runtime library search path
1804 @kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
1805 Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
1806 linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
1807 arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
1808 them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
1809 also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1810 objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
1811 @option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
1812 ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1813 @code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1814
1815 The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
1816 SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search path out of all the
1817 @option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1818 runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1819 options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1820 gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
1821 file systems.
1822
1823 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
1824 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
1825 the @option{-rpath} option.
1826 @end ifset
1827
1828 @ifset GENERIC
1829 @cindex link-time runtime library search path
1830 @kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1831 @item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1832 When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1833 happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1834 of the input files.
1835
1836 When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1837 non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1838 shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
1839 explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
1840 specifies the first set of directories to search. The
1841 @option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
1842 either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1843 appearing multiple times.
1844
1845 This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1846 that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1847 is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1848 runtime linker would do.
1849
1850 The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
1851 libraries:
1852 @enumerate
1853 @item
1854 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
1855 @item
1856 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1857 between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1858 specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1859 used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
1860 at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1861 by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1862 the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
1863 @item
1864 On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1865 @option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1866 environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
1867 @item
1868 On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1869 directories specified using @option{-L} options.
1870 @item
1871 For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
1872 variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
1873 @item
1874 For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1875 @code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1876 libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1877 @code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1878 @item
1879 The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1880 @item
1881 For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1882 exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1883 @end enumerate
1884
1885 If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1886 warning and continue with the link.
1887 @end ifset
1888
1889 @kindex -shared
1890 @kindex -Bshareable
1891 @item -shared
1892 @itemx -Bshareable
1893 @cindex shared libraries
1894 Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1895 and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
1896 shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
1897 undefined symbols in the link.
1898
1899 @kindex --sort-common
1900 @item --sort-common
1901 @itemx --sort-common=ascending
1902 @itemx --sort-common=descending
1903 This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1904 ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1905 sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1906 eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1907 between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1908 specified, then descending order is assumed.
1909
1910 @kindex --sort-section=name
1911 @item --sort-section=name
1912 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1913 patterns in the linker script.
1914
1915 @kindex --sort-section=alignment
1916 @item --sort-section=alignment
1917 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1918 patterns in the linker script.
1919
1920 @kindex --split-by-file
1921 @item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
1922 Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
1923 each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1924 size of 1 if not given.
1925
1926 @kindex --split-by-reloc
1927 @item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
1928 Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
1929 output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
1930 This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
1931 certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1932 cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1933 that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1934 support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1935 input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1936 more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
1937 many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
1938
1939 @kindex --stats
1940 @item --stats
1941 Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1942 as execution time and memory usage.
1943
1944 @kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
1945 @item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1946 Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1947 configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1948 that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1949
1950 @kindex --traditional-format
1951 @cindex traditional format
1952 @item --traditional-format
1953 For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1954 the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
1955 use the traditional format instead.
1956
1957 @cindex dbx
1958 For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
1959 symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1960 full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1961 @code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
1962 trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
1963 combine duplicate entries.
1964
1965 @kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1966 @item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1967 Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1968 address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1969 times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1970 line.
1971 @var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1972 for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1973 @samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1974 should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1975 sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1976
1977 @kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
1978 @kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
1979 @kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
1980 @cindex segment origins, cmd line
1981 @item -Tbss=@var{org}
1982 @itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
1983 @itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
1984 Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
1985 @code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
1986
1987 @kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1988 @item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1989 @cindex text segment origin, cmd line
1990 When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
1991 byte of the text segment.
1992
1993 @kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1994 @item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1995 @cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
1996 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
1997 the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
1998 text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
1999
2000 @kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2001 @item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2002 @cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
2003 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
2004 model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
2005
2006 @kindex --unresolved-symbols
2007 @item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
2008 Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
2009 values for @samp{method}:
2010
2011 @table @samp
2012 @item ignore-all
2013 Do not report any unresolved symbols.
2014
2015 @item report-all
2016 Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
2017
2018 @item ignore-in-object-files
2019 Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
2020 ignore them if they come from regular object files.
2021
2022 @item ignore-in-shared-libs
2023 Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
2024 ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
2025 when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
2026 libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
2027 command line.
2028 @end table
2029
2030 The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
2031 by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
2032
2033 Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
2034 unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
2035 can change this to a warning.
2036
2037 @kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2038 @cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2039 @item --dll-verbose
2040 @itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2041 Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
2042 supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
2043 the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
2044 argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
2045
2046 @kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2047 @cindex version script, symbol versions
2048 @item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2049 Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
2050 used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
2051 about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
2052 is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
2053 see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
2054 use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
2055 symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
2056 @xref{WIN32}.
2057
2058 @kindex --warn-common
2059 @cindex warnings, on combining symbols
2060 @cindex combining symbols, warnings on
2061 @item --warn-common
2062 Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
2063 a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
2064 but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
2065 you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
2066 Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
2067 warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
2068
2069 There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
2070
2071 @table @samp
2072 @item int i = 1;
2073 A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
2074 file.
2075
2076 @item extern int i;
2077 An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2078 There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2079 variable somewhere.
2080
2081 @item int i;
2082 A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2083 variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2084 The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2085 single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2086 size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2087 a definition of the same variable.
2088 @end table
2089
2090 The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2091 Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2092 just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2093 encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2094 a common symbol.
2095
2096 @enumerate
2097 @item
2098 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2099 definition for the symbol.
2100 @smallexample
2101 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2102 overridden by definition
2103 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2104 @end smallexample
2105
2106 @item
2107 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2108 the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2109 except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2110 @smallexample
2111 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2112 overriding common
2113 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2114 @end smallexample
2115
2116 @item
2117 Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2118 @smallexample
2119 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2120 of `@var{symbol}'
2121 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2122 @end smallexample
2123
2124 @item
2125 Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2126 @smallexample
2127 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2128 overridden by larger common
2129 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2130 @end smallexample
2131
2132 @item
2133 Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2134 the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2135 encountered in a different order.
2136 @smallexample
2137 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2138 overriding smaller common
2139 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2140 @end smallexample
2141 @end enumerate
2142
2143 @kindex --warn-constructors
2144 @item --warn-constructors
2145 Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2146 object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2147 detect the use of global constructors.
2148
2149 @kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2150 @item --warn-multiple-gp
2151 Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2152 This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2153 Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2154 section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2155 of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2156 base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2157 base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2158 bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2159 large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2160 values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2161 option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2162
2163 @kindex --warn-once
2164 @cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2165 @cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2166 @item --warn-once
2167 Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2168 which refers to it.
2169
2170 @kindex --warn-section-align
2171 @cindex warnings, on section alignment
2172 @cindex section alignment, warnings on
2173 @item --warn-section-align
2174 Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2175 alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2176 The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2177 is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2178 the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2179
2180 @kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2181 @item --warn-shared-textrel
2182 Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
2183
2184 @kindex --warn-alternate-em
2185 @item --warn-alternate-em
2186 Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2187
2188 @kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2189 @item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2190 If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2191 @option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2192 This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2193
2194 @kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2195 @item --error-unresolved-symbols
2196 This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2197 it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2198
2199 @kindex --whole-archive
2200 @cindex including an entire archive
2201 @item --whole-archive
2202 For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
2203 @option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
2204 in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2205 files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2206 library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2207 library. This option may be used more than once.
2208
2209 Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
2210 about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2211 Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
2212 list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2213 your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2214
2215 @kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2216 @item --wrap=@var{symbol}
2217 Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2218 @var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2219 undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2220 @var{symbol}.
2221
2222 This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2223 wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2224 wishes to call the system function, it should call
2225 @code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2226
2227 Here is a trivial example:
2228
2229 @smallexample
2230 void *
2231 __wrap_malloc (size_t c)
2232 @{
2233 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
2234 return __real_malloc (c);
2235 @}
2236 @end smallexample
2237
2238 If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
2239 all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2240 instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2241 call the real @code{malloc} function.
2242
2243 You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
2244 links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
2245 you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2246 file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2247 call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2248
2249 @kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2250 @item --eh-frame-hdr
2251 Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
2252 @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2253
2254 @kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2255 @item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2256 Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2257 generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2258 if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2259
2260 @kindex --enable-new-dtags
2261 @kindex --disable-new-dtags
2262 @item --enable-new-dtags
2263 @itemx --disable-new-dtags
2264 This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2265 systems may not understand them. If you specify
2266 @option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2267 and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
2268 If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
2269 created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2270 those options are only available for ELF systems.
2271
2272 @kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
2273 @item --hash-size=@var{number}
2274 Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2275 close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2276 time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2277 increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2278 value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2279
2280 @kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2281 @item --hash-style=@var{style}
2282 Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2283 @code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2284 new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2285 the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2286 hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2287
2288 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2289 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2290 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2291 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2292 @item --compress-debug-sections=none
2293 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2294 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2295 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2296 On ELF platforms , these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2297 compressed using zlib. @option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't
2298 compress DWARF debug sections.
2299 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses DWARF debug
2300 sections and rename debug section names to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
2301 instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib}
2302 and @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2303 compress DWARF debug sections with SHF_COMPRESSED from the ELF ABI.
2304 The default behaviour varies depending upon the target involved and
2305 the configure options used to build the toolchain. The default can be
2306 determined by examing the output from the linker's @option{--help} option.
2307
2308 @kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2309 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
2310 This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
2311 linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
2312 for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2313 about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2314
2315 Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2316 1021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
2317 run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2318 has been used.
2319
2320 The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2321 enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
2322
2323 @kindex --build-id
2324 @kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2325 @item --build-id
2326 @itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2327 Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
2328 or a @code{.buildid} COFF section. The contents of the note are
2329 unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2330 @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2331 @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2332 @code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2333 the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2334 string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2335 @code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2336 is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2337
2338 The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2339 that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2340 unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2341 to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2342 file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2343 string identifying the original linked file does not change.
2344
2345 Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2346 @code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
2347 @end table
2348
2349 @c man end
2350
2351 @subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
2352
2353 @c man begin OPTIONS
2354
2355 The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
2356 the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2357 normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2358 use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2359 @code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2360 like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2361 symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2362 object file).
2363
2364 In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2365 support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2366 PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2367 values by either a space or an equals sign.
2368
2369 @table @gcctabopt
2370
2371 @kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2372 @item --add-stdcall-alias
2373 If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2374 as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
2375 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2376
2377 @kindex --base-file
2378 @item --base-file @var{file}
2379 Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2380 addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2381 @file{dlltool}.
2382 [This is an i386 PE specific option]
2383
2384 @kindex --dll
2385 @item --dll
2386 Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
2387 @option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
2388 file.
2389 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2390
2391 @kindex --enable-long-section-names
2392 @kindex --disable-long-section-names
2393 @item --enable-long-section-names
2394 @itemx --disable-long-section-names
2395 The PE variants of the COFF object format add an extension that permits
2396 the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2397 for COFF. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2398 fully-linked executable images do not carry the COFF string table required
2399 to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2400 allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2401 disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2402 generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2403 as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
2404 with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2405 GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
2406 information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2407 option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2408 section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2409 when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2410 image and not stripping symbols.
2411 [This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2412
2413 @kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2414 @kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2415 @item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2416 @itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2417 If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
2418 do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
2419 only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2420 resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2421 undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2422 @code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2423 to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2424 warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2425 import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
2426 to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
2427 feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
2428 @option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
2429 mismatches are considered to be errors.
2430 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2431
2432 @kindex --leading-underscore
2433 @kindex --no-leading-underscore
2434 @item --leading-underscore
2435 @itemx --no-leading-underscore
2436 For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2437 in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2438 disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2439
2440 @cindex DLLs, creating
2441 @kindex --export-all-symbols
2442 @item --export-all-symbols
2443 If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2444 be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2445 otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2446 explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2447 attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2448 option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
2449 @code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
2450 @code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
2451 exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2452 re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2453 such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2454 @code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
2455 @code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2456 Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2457 not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
2458 extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
2459 (obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
2460 These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2461 @code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2462 @code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
2463 @code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
2464 @code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
2465 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2466
2467 @kindex --exclude-symbols
2468 @item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
2469 Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2470 exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
2471 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2472
2473 @kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2474 @item --exclude-all-symbols
2475 Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2476 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2477
2478 @kindex --file-alignment
2479 @item --file-alignment
2480 Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2481 file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2482 512.
2483 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2484
2485 @cindex heap size
2486 @kindex --heap
2487 @item --heap @var{reserve}
2488 @itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2489 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2490 to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
2491 committed.
2492 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2493
2494 @cindex image base
2495 @kindex --image-base
2496 @item --image-base @var{value}
2497 Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2498 the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2499 is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2500 your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2501 other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2502 for dlls.
2503 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2504
2505 @kindex --kill-at
2506 @item --kill-at
2507 If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2508 symbols before they are exported.
2509 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2510
2511 @kindex --large-address-aware
2512 @item --large-address-aware
2513 If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
2514 header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
2515 greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
2516 or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2517 section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2518 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2519
2520 @kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2521 @item --disable-large-address-aware
2522 Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2523 This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2524 driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2525 addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2526 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2527
2528 @kindex --major-image-version
2529 @item --major-image-version @var{value}
2530 Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
2531 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2532
2533 @kindex --major-os-version
2534 @item --major-os-version @var{value}
2535 Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
2536 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2537
2538 @kindex --major-subsystem-version
2539 @item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
2540 Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
2541 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2542
2543 @kindex --minor-image-version
2544 @item --minor-image-version @var{value}
2545 Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
2546 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2547
2548 @kindex --minor-os-version
2549 @item --minor-os-version @var{value}
2550 Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
2551 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2552
2553 @kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2554 @item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
2555 Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
2556 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2557
2558 @cindex DEF files, creating
2559 @cindex DLLs, creating
2560 @kindex --output-def
2561 @item --output-def @var{file}
2562 The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2563 file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2564 (which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2565 library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2566 automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
2567 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2568
2569 @cindex DLLs, creating
2570 @kindex --out-implib
2571 @item --out-implib @var{file}
2572 The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2573 import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2574 import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
2575 may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
2576 makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2577 creation step.
2578 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2579
2580 @kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2581 @item --enable-auto-image-base
2582 @itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2583 Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2584 @var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2585 By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2586 for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2587 execution are avoided.
2588 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2589
2590 @kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2591 @item --disable-auto-image-base
2592 Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2593 user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2594 default.
2595 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2596
2597 @cindex DLLs, linking to
2598 @kindex --dll-search-prefix
2599 @item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
2600 When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
2601 search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
2602 @code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
2603 between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2604 uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
2605 @code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
2606 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2607
2608 @kindex --enable-auto-import
2609 @item --enable-auto-import
2610 Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2611 DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
2612 building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2613 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2614 to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2615 specification published by Microsoft.
2616
2617 Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2618 data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2619 placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2620 around a problem with consts that is described here:
2621 http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2622
2623 Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2624 see this message:
2625
2626 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
2627 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2628
2629 This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2630 ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
2631 allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2632 fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2633 constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2634 multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2635 this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2636 of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2637 the warning, and exit.
2638
2639 There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2640 data type of the exported variable:
2641
2642 One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2643 of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
2644 this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2645
2646 A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2647 that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2648 there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
2649 a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2650
2651 @example
2652 extern type extern_array[];
2653 extern_array[1] -->
2654 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2655 @end example
2656
2657 or
2658
2659 @example
2660 extern type extern_array[];
2661 extern_array[1] -->
2662 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2663 @end example
2664
2665 For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2666 is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
2667
2668 @example
2669 extern struct s extern_struct;
2670 extern_struct.field -->
2671 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2672 @end example
2673
2674 or
2675
2676 @example
2677 extern long long extern_ll;
2678 extern_ll -->
2679 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2680 @end example
2681
2682 A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
2683 'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
2684 @code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
2685 requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
2686 building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2687 merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2688 between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
2689 constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2690
2691 Original:
2692 @example
2693 --foo.h
2694 extern int arr[];
2695 --foo.c
2696 #include "foo.h"
2697 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2698 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2699 @}
2700 @end example
2701
2702 Solution 1:
2703 @example
2704 --foo.h
2705 extern int arr[];
2706 --foo.c
2707 #include "foo.h"
2708 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2709 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2710 volatile int *parr = arr;
2711 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2712 @}
2713 @end example
2714
2715 Solution 2:
2716 @example
2717 --foo.h
2718 /* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2719 #if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2720 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2721 #define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2722 #else
2723 #define FOO_IMPORT
2724 #endif
2725 extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2726 --foo.c
2727 #include "foo.h"
2728 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2729 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2730 @}
2731 @end example
2732
2733 A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
2734 library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2735 for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2736 functions).
2737 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2738
2739 @kindex --disable-auto-import
2740 @item --disable-auto-import
2741 Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
2742 @code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
2743 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2744
2745 @kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2746 @item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2747 If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2748 that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2749 a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
2750 environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
2751 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2752
2753 @kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2754 @item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2755 Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
2756 DLLs.
2757 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2758
2759 @kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2760 @item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2761 Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
2762 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2763
2764 @kindex --section-alignment
2765 @item --section-alignment
2766 Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2767 addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
2768 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2769
2770 @cindex stack size
2771 @kindex --stack
2772 @item --stack @var{reserve}
2773 @itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2774 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2775 to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
2776 committed.
2777 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2778
2779 @kindex --subsystem
2780 @item --subsystem @var{which}
2781 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2782 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2783 Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2784 legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
2785 @code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2786 the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2787 @var{which}.
2788 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2789
2790 The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2791 of the PE file header:
2792 [These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2793
2794 @kindex --high-entropy-va
2795 @item --high-entropy-va
2796 Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
2797 (ASLR).
2798
2799 @kindex --dynamicbase
2800 @item --dynamicbase
2801 The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2802 randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2803 Vista for i386 PE targets.
2804
2805 @kindex --forceinteg
2806 @item --forceinteg
2807 Code integrity checks are enforced.
2808
2809 @kindex --nxcompat
2810 @item --nxcompat
2811 The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2812 This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2813
2814 @kindex --no-isolation
2815 @item --no-isolation
2816 Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2817
2818 @kindex --no-seh
2819 @item --no-seh
2820 The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2821 this image.
2822
2823 @kindex --no-bind
2824 @item --no-bind
2825 Do not bind this image.
2826
2827 @kindex --wdmdriver
2828 @item --wdmdriver
2829 The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
2830
2831 @kindex --tsaware
2832 @item --tsaware
2833 The image is Terminal Server aware.
2834
2835 @kindex --insert-timestamp
2836 @item --insert-timestamp
2837 @itemx --no-insert-timestamp
2838 Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
2839 as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
2840 other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
2841 will result in slightly different images being produced each time the
2842 same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
2843 can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
2844 that binaries produced from identical sources will compare
2845 identically.
2846 @end table
2847
2848 @c man end
2849
2850 @ifset C6X
2851 @subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2852
2853 @c man begin OPTIONS
2854
2855 The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2856 libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2857 all executables use an index of 0.
2858
2859 @table @gcctabopt
2860
2861 @kindex --dsbt-size
2862 @item --dsbt-size @var{size}
2863 This option sets the number of entries in the DSBT of the current executable
2864 or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2865 entries.
2866
2867 @kindex --dsbt-index
2868 @item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2869 This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2870 to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2871 executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
2872 @code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
2873
2874 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
2875 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
2876 exidx entries in frame unwind info.
2877
2878 @end table
2879
2880 @c man end
2881 @end ifset
2882
2883 @ifset M68HC11
2884 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2885
2886 @c man begin OPTIONS
2887
2888 The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2889 memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2890
2891 @table @gcctabopt
2892
2893 @kindex --no-trampoline
2894 @item --no-trampoline
2895 This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2896 is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2897 instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2898
2899 @kindex --bank-window
2900 @item --bank-window @var{name}
2901 This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2902 the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2903 The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2904 paging and addresses within the memory window.
2905
2906 @end table
2907
2908 @c man end
2909 @end ifset
2910
2911 @ifset M68K
2912 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2913
2914 @c man begin OPTIONS
2915
2916 The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2917 when linking for 68K targets.
2918
2919 @table @gcctabopt
2920
2921 @kindex --got
2922 @item --got=@var{type}
2923 This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2924 @var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2925 @samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2926 Info entry for @file{ld}.
2927
2928 @end table
2929
2930 @c man end
2931 @end ifset
2932
2933 @ifset MIPS
2934 @subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
2935
2936 @c man begin OPTIONS
2937
2938 The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
2939 generation when linking for MIPS targets.
2940
2941 @table @gcctabopt
2942
2943 @kindex --insn32
2944 @item --insn32
2945 @kindex --no-insn32
2946 @itemx --no-insn32
2947 These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
2948 generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
2949 or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
2950 32-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
2951 used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
2952 possible.
2953
2954 @end table
2955
2956 @c man end
2957 @end ifset
2958
2959 @ifset UsesEnvVars
2960 @node Environment
2961 @section Environment Variables
2962
2963 @c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2964
2965 You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
2966 @ifclear SingleFormat
2967 @code{GNUTARGET},
2968 @end ifclear
2969 @code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
2970
2971 @ifclear SingleFormat
2972 @kindex GNUTARGET
2973 @cindex default input format
2974 @code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2975 use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2976 of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
2977 @code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
2978 of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2979 attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2980 this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2981 there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2982 object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2983 BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2984 in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
2985 @end ifclear
2986
2987 @kindex LDEMULATION
2988 @cindex default emulation
2989 @cindex emulation, default
2990 @code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2991 @samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2992 behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2993 available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2994 the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2995 variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2996 linker was configured.
2997
2998 @kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2999 @cindex demangling, default
3000 Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
3001 @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
3002 default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
3003 a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
3004 may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
3005 options.
3006
3007 @c man end
3008 @end ifset
3009
3010 @node Scripts
3011 @chapter Linker Scripts
3012
3013 @cindex scripts
3014 @cindex linker scripts
3015 @cindex command files
3016 Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
3017 written in the linker command language.
3018
3019 The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
3020 the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
3021 the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
3022 more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
3023 direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
3024 described below.
3025
3026 The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
3027 yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
3028 linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
3029 to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
3030 such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
3031
3032 You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
3033 line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
3034 default linker script.
3035
3036 You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
3037 to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
3038 Linker Scripts}.
3039
3040 @menu
3041 * Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
3042 * Script Format:: Linker Script Format
3043 * Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
3044 * Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
3045 * Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
3046 * SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
3047 * MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
3048 * PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
3049 * VERSION:: VERSION Command
3050 * Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
3051 * Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
3052 @end menu
3053
3054 @node Basic Script Concepts
3055 @section Basic Linker Script Concepts
3056 @cindex linker script concepts
3057 We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
3058 describe the linker script language.
3059
3060 The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
3061 file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
3062 @dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
3063 The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
3064 purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
3065 among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
3066 section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
3067 in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
3068
3069 Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3070 also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
3071 contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
3072 the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3073 A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3074 area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3075 loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3076 which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3077 of debugging information.
3078
3079 Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3080 first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3081 the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3082 @dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3083 section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3084 same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3085 is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3086 (this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3087 based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3088 RAM address would be the VMA.
3089
3090 You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3091 program with the @samp{-h} option.
3092
3093 Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3094 @dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3095 has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3096 information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3097 will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3098 static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3099 referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3100
3101 You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3102 program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3103 option.
3104
3105 @node Script Format
3106 @section Linker Script Format
3107 @cindex linker script format
3108 Linker scripts are text files.
3109
3110 You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3111 either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3112 symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3113 generally ignored.
3114
3115 Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3116 If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3117 otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3118 double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3119 file name.
3120
3121 You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3122 @samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3123 to whitespace.
3124
3125 @node Simple Example
3126 @section Simple Linker Script Example
3127 @cindex linker script example
3128 @cindex example of linker script
3129 Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3130
3131 The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3132 @samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3133 memory layout of the output file.
3134
3135 The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3136 describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3137 code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3138 @samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3139 Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3140 your input files.
3141
3142 For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
3143 0x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3144 linker script which will do that:
3145 @smallexample
3146 SECTIONS
3147 @{
3148 . = 0x10000;
3149 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3150 . = 0x8000000;
3151 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3152 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3153 @}
3154 @end smallexample
3155
3156 You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3157 followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3158 descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3159
3160 The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3161 sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3162 counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3163 other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3164 current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3165 incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3166 @samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3167
3168 The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3169 required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3170 after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3171 which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3172 wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3173 means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3174
3175 Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3176 @samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3177 @samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3178
3179 The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3180 the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3181 at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3182 output section, the value of the location counter will be
3183 @samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3184 effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
3185 immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
3186
3187 The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3188 alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3189 example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3190 sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3191 may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3192 sections.
3193
3194 That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3195
3196 @node Simple Commands
3197 @section Simple Linker Script Commands
3198 @cindex linker script simple commands
3199 In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3200
3201 @menu
3202 * Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3203 * File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3204 @ifclear SingleFormat
3205 * Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3206 @end ifclear
3207
3208 * REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
3209 * Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3210 @end menu
3211
3212 @node Entry Point
3213 @subsection Setting the Entry Point
3214 @kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3215 @cindex start of execution
3216 @cindex first instruction
3217 @cindex entry point
3218 The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3219 point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3220 entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3221 @smallexample
3222 ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3223 @end smallexample
3224
3225 There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3226 entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3227 stopping when one of them succeeds:
3228 @itemize @bullet
3229 @item
3230 the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
3231 @item
3232 the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
3233 @item
3234 the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3235 targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3236 check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
3237 @item
3238 the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
3239 @item
3240 The address @code{0}.
3241 @end itemize
3242
3243 @node File Commands
3244 @subsection Commands Dealing with Files
3245 @cindex linker script file commands
3246 Several linker script commands deal with files.
3247
3248 @table @code
3249 @item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3250 @kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3251 @cindex including a linker script
3252 Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3253 be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
3254 with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
3255 10 levels deep.
3256
3257 You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3258 @code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3259
3260 @item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3261 @itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3262 @kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3263 @cindex input files in linker scripts
3264 @cindex input object files in linker scripts
3265 @cindex linker script input object files
3266 The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3267 in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3268
3269 For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3270 a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3271 then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3272
3273 In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3274 script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3275
3276 In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3277 with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3278 located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3279 for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3280 open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
3281 linker will search through the archive library search path.
3282 The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3283 as the first character in the filename path. See also the
3284 description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3285
3286 If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
3287 name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3288 @samp{-l}.
3289
3290 When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3291 files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3292 script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3293
3294 @item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3295 @itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3296 @kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3297 @cindex grouping input files
3298 The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3299 files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3300 new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3301 in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3302
3303 @item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3304 @itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3305 @kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3306 This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3307 commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3308 as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3309 with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3310 when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3311 @option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3312 and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3313 setting afterwards.
3314
3315 @item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3316 @kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3317 @cindex output file name in linker script
3318 The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3319 @code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3320 @samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3321 Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3322 precedence.
3323
3324 You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3325 output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3326
3327 @item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3328 @kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3329 @cindex library search path in linker script
3330 @cindex archive search path in linker script
3331 @cindex search path in linker script
3332 The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
3333 @command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
3334 @code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3335 on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3336 are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3337 the command line option are searched first.
3338
3339 @item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3340 @kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3341 @cindex first input file
3342 The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3343 that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3344 though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3345 when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3346 first file.
3347 @end table
3348
3349 @ifclear SingleFormat
3350 @node Format Commands
3351 @subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
3352 A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3353
3354 @table @code
3355 @item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3356 @itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3357 @kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3358 @cindex output file format in linker script
3359 The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3360 output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
3361 exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3362 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3363 line option takes precedence.
3364
3365 You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3366 formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3367 This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3368 desired endianness.
3369
3370 If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3371 will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3372 output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3373 used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3374
3375 For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3376 command:
3377 @smallexample
3378 OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3379 @end smallexample
3380 This says that the default format for the output file is
3381 @samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3382 option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3383 format.
3384
3385 @item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3386 @kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3387 @cindex input file format in linker script
3388 The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3389 files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3390 This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3391 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3392 is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3393 command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3394 @end table
3395 @end ifclear
3396
3397 @node REGION_ALIAS
3398 @subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3399 @kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3400 @cindex region alias
3401 @cindex region names
3402
3403 Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3404 @ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3405
3406 @smallexample
3407 REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3408 @end smallexample
3409
3410 The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3411 memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3412 to memory regions. An example follows.
3413
3414 Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3415 memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3416 that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3417 non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3418 access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3419 read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3420 sections:
3421
3422 @itemize @bullet
3423 @item
3424 @code{.text} program code;
3425 @item
3426 @code{.rodata} read-only data;
3427 @item
3428 @code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3429 @item
3430 @code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3431 @end itemize
3432
3433 The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3434 part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3435 output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3436 systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3437 @code{C}:
3438 @multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3439 @item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
3440 @item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
3441 @item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3442 @item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3443 @item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3444 @end multitable
3445 The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3446 loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3447 the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3448 the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3449
3450 The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3451 includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3452 memory layout:
3453 @smallexample
3454 INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3455
3456 SECTIONS
3457 @{
3458 .text :
3459 @{
3460 *(.text)
3461 @} > REGION_TEXT
3462 .rodata :
3463 @{
3464 *(.rodata)
3465 rodata_end = .;
3466 @} > REGION_RODATA
3467 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3468 @{
3469 data_start = .;
3470 *(.data)
3471 @} > REGION_DATA
3472 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3473 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3474 .bss :
3475 @{
3476 *(.bss)
3477 @} > REGION_BSS
3478 @}
3479 @end smallexample
3480
3481 Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3482 regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3483 variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3484 @table @code
3485 @item A
3486 Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3487 @smallexample
3488 MEMORY
3489 @{
3490 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3491 @}
3492
3493 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3494 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3495 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3496 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3497 @end smallexample
3498 @item B
3499 Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3500 into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3501 @code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3502 @smallexample
3503 MEMORY
3504 @{
3505 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3506 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3507 @}
3508
3509 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3510 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3511 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3512 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3513 @end smallexample
3514 @item C
3515 Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3516 @code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3517 initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3518 system start into the @code{RAM}.
3519 @smallexample
3520 MEMORY
3521 @{
3522 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3523 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3524 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3525 @}
3526
3527 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3528 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3529 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3530 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3531 @end smallexample
3532 @end table
3533
3534 It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3535 @code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3536 necessary:
3537 @smallexample
3538 #include <string.h>
3539
3540 extern char data_start [];
3541 extern char data_size [];
3542 extern char data_load_start [];
3543
3544 void copy_data(void)
3545 @{
3546 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3547 @{
3548 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3549 @}
3550 @}
3551 @end smallexample
3552
3553 @node Miscellaneous Commands
3554 @subsection Other Linker Script Commands
3555 There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3556
3557 @table @code
3558 @item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3559 @kindex ASSERT
3560 @cindex assertion in linker script
3561 Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3562 with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3563
3564 Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3565 take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3566 inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3567 for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3568 symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3569
3570 @smallexample
3571 .stack :
3572 @{
3573 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3574 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3575 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3576 @}
3577 @end smallexample
3578
3579 will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3580 PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3581 can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3582
3583 @smallexample
3584 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3585 .stack :
3586 @{
3587 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3588 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3589 @}
3590 @end smallexample
3591
3592 will work.
3593
3594 @item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3595 @kindex EXTERN
3596 @cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3597 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3598 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3599 modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3600 each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3601 command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3602
3603 @item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3604 @kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3605 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3606 This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
3607 to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
3608 output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3609
3610 @item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3611 @kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3612 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3613 This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3614 command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3615 to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3616
3617 @item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3618 @kindex INSERT
3619 @cindex insert user script into default script
3620 This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3621 augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3622 inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3623 @var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3624 default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3625 sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3626 linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3627 insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3628 linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3629 default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3630 of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3631 to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3632 is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3633
3634 @smallexample
3635 SECTIONS
3636 @{
3637 OVERLAY :
3638 @{
3639 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3640 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3641 @}
3642 @}
3643 INSERT AFTER .text;
3644 @end smallexample
3645
3646 @item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3647 @kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3648 @cindex cross references
3649 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3650 references among certain output sections.
3651
3652 In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3653 using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3654 will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3655 errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3656 a function defined in the other section.
3657
3658 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
3659 @command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
3660 an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3661 @code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3662 names.
3663
3664 @ifclear SingleFormat
3665 @item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3666 @kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3667 @cindex machine architecture
3668 @cindex architecture
3669 Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3670 of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3671 architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3672 the @samp{-f} option.
3673 @end ifclear
3674
3675 @item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3676 @kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3677 This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3678 @var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3679 in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3680 @xref{Expression Section}.
3681 @end table
3682
3683 @node Assignments
3684 @section Assigning Values to Symbols
3685 @cindex assignment in scripts
3686 @cindex symbol definition, scripts
3687 @cindex variables, defining
3688 You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
3689 the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
3690
3691 @menu
3692 * Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
3693 * HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
3694 * PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
3695 * PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3696 * Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
3697 @end menu
3698
3699 @node Simple Assignments
3700 @subsection Simple Assignments
3701
3702 You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3703
3704 @table @code
3705 @item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3706 @itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3707 @itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3708 @itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3709 @itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3710 @itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3711 @itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3712 @itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3713 @itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3714 @end table
3715
3716 The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3717 @var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3718 defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3719
3720 The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
3721 may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
3722
3723 The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3724
3725 Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3726
3727 You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3728 statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3729 section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3730
3731 The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3732 expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3733
3734 Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3735 assignments may be used:
3736
3737 @smallexample
3738 floating_point = 0;
3739 SECTIONS
3740 @{
3741 .text :
3742 @{
3743 *(.text)
3744 _etext = .;
3745 @}
3746 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
3747 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3748 @}
3749 @end smallexample
3750 @noindent
3751 In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3752 zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3753 the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3754 defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3755 upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3756
3757 @node HIDDEN
3758 @subsection HIDDEN
3759 @cindex HIDDEN
3760 For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3761 exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3762
3763 Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3764 @code{HIDDEN}:
3765
3766 @smallexample
3767 HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3768 SECTIONS
3769 @{
3770 .text :
3771 @{
3772 *(.text)
3773 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3774 @}
3775 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3776 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3777 @}
3778 @end smallexample
3779 @noindent
3780 In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3781
3782 @node PROVIDE
3783 @subsection PROVIDE
3784 @cindex PROVIDE
3785 In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3786 only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3787 the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3788 @samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3789 @samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3790 @code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3791 @samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3792 @code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3793
3794 Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3795 @smallexample
3796 SECTIONS
3797 @{
3798 .text :
3799 @{
3800 *(.text)
3801 _etext = .;
3802 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3803 @}
3804 @}
3805 @end smallexample
3806
3807 In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3808 underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3809 the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3810 underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3811 If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3812 linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3813
3814 @node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3815 @subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3816 @cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3817 Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3818 hidden and won't be exported.
3819
3820 @node Source Code Reference
3821 @subsection Source Code Reference
3822
3823 Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3824 intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3825 a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3826 symbol that does not have a value.
3827
3828 Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3829 transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3830 stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3831 prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3832 mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3833 of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3834 variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3835 linker script variable might be referred to as:
3836
3837 @smallexample
3838 extern int foo;
3839 @end smallexample
3840
3841 But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3842
3843 @smallexample
3844 _foo = 1000;
3845 @end smallexample
3846
3847 In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3848 transformation has taken place.
3849
3850 When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3851 things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3852 in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3853 second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3854 table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3855 contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3856 value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3857
3858 @smallexample
3859 int foo = 1000;
3860 @end smallexample
3861
3862 creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
3863 holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3864 number 1000 is initially stored.
3865
3866 When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3867 first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3868 memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3869 So:
3870
3871 @smallexample
3872 foo = 1;
3873 @end smallexample
3874
3875 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3876 associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3877 address. Whereas:
3878
3879 @smallexample
3880 int * a = & foo;
3881 @end smallexample
3882
3883 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
3884 and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3885 the variable @samp{a}.
3886
3887 Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3888 the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3889 an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3890
3891 @smallexample
3892 foo = 1000;
3893 @end smallexample
3894
3895 creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3896 the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3897 address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3898 linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3899 access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3900
3901 Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3902 you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3903 use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3904 section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3905 linker script contains these declarations:
3906
3907 @smallexample
3908 @group
3909 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
3910 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
3911 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3912 @end group
3913 @end smallexample
3914
3915 Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3916
3917 @smallexample
3918 @group
3919 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
3920
3921 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3922 @end group
3923 @end smallexample
3924
3925 Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3926 Alternatively the symbols can be treated as the names of vectors or
3927 arrays and then the code will again work as expected:
3928
3929 @smallexample
3930 @group
3931 extern char start_of_ROM[], end_of_ROM[], start_of_FLASH[];
3932
3933 memcpy (start_of_FLASH, start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM - start_of_ROM);
3934 @end group
3935 @end smallexample
3936
3937 Note how using this method does not require the use of @samp{&}
3938 operators.
3939
3940 @node SECTIONS
3941 @section SECTIONS Command
3942 @kindex SECTIONS
3943 The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3944 into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3945
3946 The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3947 @smallexample
3948 SECTIONS
3949 @{
3950 @var{sections-command}
3951 @var{sections-command}
3952 @dots{}
3953 @}
3954 @end smallexample
3955
3956 Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3957
3958 @itemize @bullet
3959 @item
3960 an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3961 @item
3962 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3963 @item
3964 an output section description
3965 @item
3966 an overlay description
3967 @end itemize
3968
3969 The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3970 @code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3971 those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3972 understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3973 the layout of the output file.
3974
3975 Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3976 below.
3977
3978 If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3979 linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3980 section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3981 input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3982 example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3983 in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3984
3985 @menu
3986 * Output Section Description:: Output section description
3987 * Output Section Name:: Output section name
3988 * Output Section Address:: Output section address
3989 * Input Section:: Input section description
3990 * Output Section Data:: Output section data
3991 * Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3992 * Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3993 * Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3994 * Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3995 @end menu
3996
3997 @node Output Section Description
3998 @subsection Output Section Description
3999 The full description of an output section looks like this:
4000 @smallexample
4001 @group
4002 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
4003 [AT(@var{lma})]
4004 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
4005 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4006 [@var{constraint}]
4007 @{
4008 @var{output-section-command}
4009 @var{output-section-command}
4010 @dots{}
4011 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
4012 @end group
4013 @end smallexample
4014
4015 Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
4016
4017 The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
4018 name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
4019 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
4020 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
4021 The line breaks and other white space are optional.
4022
4023 Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
4024
4025 @itemize @bullet
4026 @item
4027 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4028 @item
4029 an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
4030 @item
4031 data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
4032 @item
4033 a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
4034 @end itemize
4035
4036 @node Output Section Name
4037 @subsection Output Section Name
4038 @cindex name, section
4039 @cindex section name
4040 The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
4041 meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
4042 support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
4043 must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
4044 example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
4045 output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
4046 names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
4047 quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
4048 characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
4049 commas must be quoted.
4050
4051 The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
4052 Discarding}.
4053
4054 @node Output Section Address
4055 @subsection Output Section Address
4056 @cindex address, section
4057 @cindex section address
4058 The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
4059 address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
4060 is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
4061
4062 If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
4063 section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
4064 to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
4065 alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
4066 contained within the output section.
4067
4068 The output section address heuristic is as follows:
4069
4070 @itemize @bullet
4071 @item
4072 If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
4073 is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
4074 in that region.
4075
4076 @item
4077 If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
4078 regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
4079 section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
4080 be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
4081
4082 @item
4083 If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4084 the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4085 counter.
4086 @end itemize
4087
4088 @noindent
4089 For example:
4090
4091 @smallexample
4092 .text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4093 @end smallexample
4094
4095 @noindent
4096 and
4097
4098 @smallexample
4099 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4100 @end smallexample
4101
4102 @noindent
4103 are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4104 @samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4105 counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
4106 counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4107 input sections.
4108
4109 The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4110 For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4111 so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4112 do something like this:
4113 @smallexample
4114 .text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4115 @end smallexample
4116 @noindent
4117 This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4118 aligned upward to the specified value.
4119
4120 Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
4121 location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4122 sections are ignored).
4123
4124 @node Input Section
4125 @subsection Input Section Description
4126 @cindex input sections
4127 @cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4128 The most common output section command is an input section description.
4129
4130 The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4131 You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4132 in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4133 map the input files into your memory layout.
4134
4135 @menu
4136 * Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4137 * Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4138 * Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4139 * Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4140 * Input Section Example:: Input section example
4141 @end menu
4142
4143 @node Input Section Basics
4144 @subsubsection Input Section Basics
4145 @cindex input section basics
4146 An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4147 by a list of section names in parentheses.
4148
4149 The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4150 describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4151
4152 The most common input section description is to include all input
4153 sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4154 include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4155 @smallexample
4156 *(.text)
4157 @end smallexample
4158 @noindent
4159 Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
4160 of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4161 match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4162 example:
4163 @smallexample
4164 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
4165 @end smallexample
4166 will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
4167 @file{otherfile.o} to be included.
4168
4169 There are two ways to include more than one section:
4170 @smallexample
4171 *(.text .rdata)
4172 *(.text) *(.rdata)
4173 @end smallexample
4174 @noindent
4175 The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4176 @samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
4177 first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4178 they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
4179 @samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4180 @samp{.rdata} input sections.
4181
4182 You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4183 You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4184 needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4185 @smallexample
4186 data.o(.data)
4187 @end smallexample
4188
4189 To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4190 of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4191
4192 Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4193
4194 @smallexample
4195 @group
4196 SECTIONS @{
4197 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4198 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4199 @}
4200 @end group
4201 @end smallexample
4202
4203 In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4204 input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4205 @code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4206 @samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4207 whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4208
4209 You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4210 matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4211 with no whitespace around the colon.
4212
4213 @table @samp
4214 @item archive:file
4215 matches file within archive
4216 @item archive:
4217 matches the whole archive
4218 @item :file
4219 matches file but not one in an archive
4220 @end table
4221
4222 Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4223 wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4224 single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4225 @samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4226 within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4227 also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4228 other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4229 from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4230 command.
4231
4232 If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4233 the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4234 commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4235 @smallexample
4236 data.o
4237 @end smallexample
4238
4239 When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4240 and does not contain any wild card
4241 characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4242 name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4243 did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4244 though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4245 @code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4246 the archive search path.
4247
4248 @node Input Section Wildcards
4249 @subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
4250 @cindex input section wildcards
4251 @cindex wildcard file name patterns
4252 @cindex file name wildcard patterns
4253 @cindex section name wildcard patterns
4254 In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4255 name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4256
4257 The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4258 pattern for the file name.
4259
4260 The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4261
4262 @table @samp
4263 @item *
4264 matches any number of characters
4265 @item ?
4266 matches any single character
4267 @item [@var{chars}]
4268 matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4269 character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4270 @samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4271 @item \
4272 quotes the following character
4273 @end table
4274
4275 When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4276 will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4277 Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4278 exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4279 @samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4280 a @samp{/} character.
4281
4282 File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4283 specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4284 does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4285
4286 If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4287 appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4288 will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4289 sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4290 @file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4291 @smallexample
4292 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4293 .data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4294 @end smallexample
4295
4296 @cindex SORT_BY_NAME
4297 Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4298 in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
4299 this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4300 pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4301 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
4302 into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4303
4304 @cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4305 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4306 difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
4307 descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
4308 Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4309 reduce the amount of padding necessary.
4310
4311 @cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4312 @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4313 difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4314 ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4315 encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4316
4317 @cindex SORT
4318 @code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4319
4320 When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4321 can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4322
4323 @enumerate
4324 @item
4325 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4326 It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
4327 sections have the same name.
4328 @item
4329 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4330 It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
4331 sections have the same alignment.
4332 @item
4333 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
4334 treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4335 @item
4336 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4337 is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4338 @item
4339 All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4340 @end enumerate
4341
4342 When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4343 section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4344 takes precedence over the command line option.
4345
4346 If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4347 command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4348 treated as nested sorting command.
4349
4350 @enumerate
4351 @item
4352 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4353 @option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4354 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4355 @item
4356 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4357 @option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4358 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4359 @end enumerate
4360
4361 If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4362 command line option will be ignored.
4363
4364 @cindex SORT_NONE
4365 @code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4366 section sorting option.
4367
4368 If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4369 @samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4370 precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4371
4372 This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4373 files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4374 sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4375 The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4376 with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4377 linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4378 @smallexample
4379 @group
4380 SECTIONS @{
4381 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4382 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4383 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4384 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4385 @}
4386 @end group
4387 @end smallexample
4388
4389 @node Input Section Common
4390 @subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
4391 @cindex common symbol placement
4392 @cindex uninitialized data placement
4393 A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4394 file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4395 linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4396 named @samp{COMMON}.
4397
4398 You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4399 other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4400 particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4401 input files are placed in another section.
4402
4403 In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4404 @samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4405 @smallexample
4406 .bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4407 @end smallexample
4408
4409 @cindex scommon section
4410 @cindex small common symbols
4411 Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4412 example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4413 symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4414 different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4415 the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4416 symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4417 to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4418 locations.
4419
4420 @cindex [COMMON]
4421 You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4422 notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4423 @samp{*(COMMON)}.
4424
4425 @node Input Section Keep
4426 @subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
4427 @cindex KEEP
4428 @cindex garbage collection
4429 When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
4430 it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
4431 This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4432 with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
4433 @code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
4434
4435 @node Input Section Example
4436 @subsubsection Input Section Example
4437 The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4438 to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4439 start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4440 @samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4441 follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4442 @samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4443 @samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4444 All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4445 files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4446
4447 @smallexample
4448 @group
4449 SECTIONS @{
4450 outputa 0x10000 :
4451 @{
4452 all.o
4453 foo.o (.input1)
4454 @}
4455 @end group
4456 @group
4457 outputb :
4458 @{
4459 foo.o (.input2)
4460 foo1.o (.input1)
4461 @}
4462 @end group
4463 @group
4464 outputc :
4465 @{
4466 *(.input1)
4467 *(.input2)
4468 @}
4469 @}
4470 @end group
4471 @end smallexample
4472
4473 @node Output Section Data
4474 @subsection Output Section Data
4475 @cindex data
4476 @cindex section data
4477 @cindex output section data
4478 @kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4479 @kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4480 @kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4481 @kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4482 @kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4483 You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4484 @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4485 an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4486 parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4487 value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4488 counter.
4489
4490 The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4491 store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4492 bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4493 stored.
4494
4495 For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4496 of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4497 @smallexample
4498 BYTE(1)
4499 LONG(addr)
4500 @end smallexample
4501
4502 When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4503 same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4504 target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4505 @code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4506 @code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4507
4508 If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4509 which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4510 When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4511 true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4512 endianness of the first input object file.
4513
4514 Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
4515 between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4516 @smallexample
4517 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4518 @end smallexample
4519 whereas this will work:
4520 @smallexample
4521 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4522 @end smallexample
4523
4524 @kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4525 @cindex holes, filling
4526 @cindex unspecified memory
4527 You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4528 current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4529 otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4530 gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
4531 with the value of the expression, repeated as
4532 necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4533 point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4534 than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4535 different parts of an output section.
4536
4537 This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
4538 value @samp{0x90}:
4539 @smallexample
4540 FILL(0x90909090)
4541 @end smallexample
4542
4543 The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
4544 section attribute, but it only affects the
4545 part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4546 entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
4547 precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
4548 expression.
4549
4550 @node Output Section Keywords
4551 @subsection Output Section Keywords
4552 There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4553 commands.
4554
4555 @table @code
4556 @kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4557 @cindex input filename symbols
4558 @cindex filename symbols
4559 @item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4560 The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4561 The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4562 file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4563 the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4564
4565 This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4566 normally used for any other object file format.
4567
4568 @kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4569 @cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4570 @cindex constructors, arranging in link
4571 @item CONSTRUCTORS
4572 When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4573 unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4574 destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4575 arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4576 automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4577 For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4578 linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4579 @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4580 ignored for other object file formats.
4581
4582 The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
4583 constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4584 Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4585 the start and end of the global destructors. The
4586 first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4587 of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4588 compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4589 formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4590 @code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4591 the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4592 destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4593 @code{exit}.
4594
4595 For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4596 arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4597 addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4598 and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4599 linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4600 runtime code expects to see.
4601
4602 @smallexample
4603 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4604 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4605 *(.ctors)
4606 LONG(0)
4607 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4608 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4609 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4610 *(.dtors)
4611 LONG(0)
4612 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4613 @end smallexample
4614
4615 If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4616 which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4617 are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4618 are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
4619 command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4620 @code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4621 @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
4622 @samp{*(.dtors)}.
4623
4624 Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4625 and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4626 need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4627 scripts.
4628
4629 @end table
4630
4631 @node Output Section Discarding
4632 @subsection Output Section Discarding
4633 @cindex discarding sections
4634 @cindex sections, discarding
4635 @cindex removing sections
4636 The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4637 This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4638 may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
4639 @smallexample
4640 .foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
4641 @end smallexample
4642 @noindent
4643 will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
4644 @samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4645 sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
4646 space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4647 too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4648 space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4649 @samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4650 @samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4651 This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
4652
4653 The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
4654 on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4655 symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
4656 the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4657 section is discarded.
4658
4659 @cindex /DISCARD/
4660 The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4661 input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4662 section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4663
4664 @node Output Section Attributes
4665 @subsection Output Section Attributes
4666 @cindex output section attributes
4667 We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4668 like this:
4669
4670 @smallexample
4671 @group
4672 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
4673 [AT(@var{lma})]
4674 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4675 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4676 [@var{constraint}]
4677 @{
4678 @var{output-section-command}
4679 @var{output-section-command}
4680 @dots{}
4681 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
4682 @end group
4683 @end smallexample
4684
4685 We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4686 @var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4687 remaining section attributes.
4688
4689 @menu
4690 * Output Section Type:: Output section type
4691 * Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
4692 * Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
4693 * Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
4694 * Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
4695 * Output Section Region:: Output section region
4696 * Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4697 * Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4698 @end menu
4699
4700 @node Output Section Type
4701 @subsubsection Output Section Type
4702 Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4703 parentheses. The following types are defined:
4704
4705 @table @code
4706 @item NOLOAD
4707 The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4708 loaded into memory when the program is run.
4709 @item DSECT
4710 @itemx COPY
4711 @itemx INFO
4712 @itemx OVERLAY
4713 These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4714 rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4715 marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4716 section when the program is run.
4717 @end table
4718
4719 @kindex NOLOAD
4720 @cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4721 @cindex loading, preventing
4722 The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4723 the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4724 the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4725 @samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
4726 need to be loaded when the program is run.
4727 @smallexample
4728 @group
4729 SECTIONS @{
4730 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4731 @dots{}
4732 @}
4733 @end group
4734 @end smallexample
4735
4736 @node Output Section LMA
4737 @subsubsection Output Section LMA
4738 @kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
4739 @kindex AT(@var{lma})
4740 @cindex load address
4741 @cindex section load address
4742 Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
4743 @ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4744 @pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4745 specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4746 address is optional.
4747
4748 The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4749 specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4750 takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4751 load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4752 region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
4753
4754 If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
4755 section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4756 load address:
4757
4758 @itemize @bullet
4759 @item
4760 If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4761 the LMA address as well.
4762
4763 @item
4764 If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4765
4766 @item
4767 Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4768 with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4769 section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4770 VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4771 the last section in the located region.
4772
4773 @item
4774 If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4775 that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4776
4777 @item
4778 If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4779 section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4780 @end itemize
4781
4782 @cindex ROM initialized data
4783 @cindex initialized data in ROM
4784 This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4785 example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4786 called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4787 @samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4788 even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4789 uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4790 defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4791 counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4792
4793 @smallexample
4794 @group
4795 SECTIONS
4796 @{
4797 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
4798 .mdata 0x2000 :
4799 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4800 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4801 .bss 0x3000 :
4802 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4803 @}
4804 @end group
4805 @end smallexample
4806
4807 The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4808 this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4809 the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4810 how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4811 script.
4812
4813 @smallexample
4814 @group
4815 extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4816 char *src = &_etext;
4817 char *dst = &_data;
4818
4819 /* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4820 while (dst < &_edata)
4821 *dst++ = *src++;
4822
4823 /* Zero bss. */
4824 for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4825 *dst = 0;
4826 @end group
4827 @end smallexample
4828
4829 @node Forced Output Alignment
4830 @subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4831 @kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4832 @cindex forcing output section alignment
4833 @cindex output section alignment
4834 You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
4835 alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
4836 intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
4837
4838 @node Forced Input Alignment
4839 @subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4840 @kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4841 @cindex forcing input section alignment
4842 @cindex input section alignment
4843 You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4844 SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4845 sections, whether larger or smaller.
4846
4847 @node Output Section Constraint
4848 @subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4849 @kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4850 @kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4851 @cindex constraints on output sections
4852 You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4853 of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4854 read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4855 @code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4856
4857 @node Output Section Region
4858 @subsubsection Output Section Region
4859 @kindex >@var{region}
4860 @cindex section, assigning to memory region
4861 @cindex memory regions and sections
4862 You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4863 using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4864
4865 Here is a simple example:
4866 @smallexample
4867 @group
4868 MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4869 SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4870 @end group
4871 @end smallexample
4872
4873 @node Output Section Phdr
4874 @subsubsection Output Section Phdr
4875 @kindex :@var{phdr}
4876 @cindex section, assigning to program header
4877 @cindex program headers and sections
4878 You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4879 using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4880 one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4881 assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4882 @code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4883 linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4884
4885 Here is a simple example:
4886 @smallexample
4887 @group
4888 PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4889 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4890 @end group
4891 @end smallexample
4892
4893 @node Output Section Fill
4894 @subsubsection Output Section Fill
4895 @kindex =@var{fillexp}
4896 @cindex section fill pattern
4897 @cindex fill pattern, entire section
4898 You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4899 @samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4900 (@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4901 within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
4902 alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4903 necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
4904 of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
4905 an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4906 fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
4907 other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
4908 pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4909 expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
4910
4911 You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
4912 output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
4913
4914 Here is a simple example:
4915 @smallexample
4916 @group
4917 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
4918 @end group
4919 @end smallexample
4920
4921 @node Overlay Description
4922 @subsection Overlay Description
4923 @kindex OVERLAY
4924 @cindex overlays
4925 An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4926 are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4927 the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4928 copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4929 required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4930 can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4931 than another.
4932
4933 Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4934 @code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4935 output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4936 command is as follows:
4937 @smallexample
4938 @group
4939 OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4940 @{
4941 @var{secname1}
4942 @{
4943 @var{output-section-command}
4944 @var{output-section-command}
4945 @dots{}
4946 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4947 @var{secname2}
4948 @{
4949 @var{output-section-command}
4950 @var{output-section-command}
4951 @dots{}
4952 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4953 @dots{}
4954 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
4955 @end group
4956 @end smallexample
4957
4958 Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4959 section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4960 section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
4961 those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
4962 except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4963 sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4964
4965 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
4966 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
4967
4968 The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4969 addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4970 memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4971 whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4972 and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4973 and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4974
4975 If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
4976 references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
4977 the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
4978 sense for one section to refer directly to another.
4979 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
4980
4981 For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
4982 provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
4983 defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4984 @code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4985 the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4986 within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4987 symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4988
4989 At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4990 the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4991
4992 Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4993 @code{SECTIONS} construct.
4994 @smallexample
4995 @group
4996 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4997 @{
4998 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4999 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5000 @}
5001 @end group
5002 @end smallexample
5003 @noindent
5004 This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
5005 address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
5006 @samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
5007 following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
5008 @code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
5009 @code{__load_stop_text1}.
5010
5011 C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
5012 like the following.
5013
5014 @smallexample
5015 @group
5016 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
5017 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
5018 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
5019 @end group
5020 @end smallexample
5021
5022 Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
5023 everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
5024 example could have been written identically as follows.
5025
5026 @smallexample
5027 @group
5028 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5029 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
5030 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
5031 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5032 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
5033 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
5034 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
5035 @end group
5036 @end smallexample
5037
5038 @node MEMORY
5039 @section MEMORY Command
5040 @kindex MEMORY
5041 @cindex memory regions
5042 @cindex regions of memory
5043 @cindex allocating memory
5044 @cindex discontinuous memory
5045 The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
5046 memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
5047
5048 The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
5049 memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
5050 may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
5051 can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
5052 set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
5053 regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
5054 around to fit into the available regions.
5055
5056 A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
5057 however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
5058 specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command. The syntax for
5059 @code{MEMORY} is:
5060 @smallexample
5061 @group
5062 MEMORY
5063 @{
5064 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
5065 @dots{}
5066 @}
5067 @end group
5068 @end smallexample
5069
5070 The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
5071 region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
5072 Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5073 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
5074 must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
5075 add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
5076 command.
5077
5078 @cindex memory region attributes
5079 The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
5080 whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
5081 not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
5082 @ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
5083 section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5084 the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5085 them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5086
5087 The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5088 @table @samp
5089 @item R
5090 Read-only section
5091 @item W
5092 Read/write section
5093 @item X
5094 Executable section
5095 @item A
5096 Allocatable section
5097 @item I
5098 Initialized section
5099 @item L
5100 Same as @samp{I}
5101 @item !
5102 Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
5103 @end table
5104
5105 If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
5106 @samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
5107 attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
5108 in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
5109 attributes.
5110
5111 @kindex ORIGIN =
5112 @kindex o =
5113 @kindex org =
5114 The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5115 the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5116 cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5117 abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5118 @code{ORG}).
5119
5120 @kindex LENGTH =
5121 @kindex len =
5122 @kindex l =
5123 The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5124 region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
5125 be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5126 @code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
5127
5128 In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5129 available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5130 and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5131 linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5132 is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5133 or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5134 explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5135 region.
5136
5137 @smallexample
5138 @group
5139 MEMORY
5140 @{
5141 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5142 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5143 @}
5144 @end group
5145 @end smallexample
5146
5147 Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5148 specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5149 @samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5150 a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5151 output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5152 was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5153 the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5154 output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5155 region, the linker will issue an error message.
5156
5157 It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
5158 expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
5159 @code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5160
5161 @smallexample
5162 @group
5163 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
5164 @end group
5165 @end smallexample
5166
5167 @node PHDRS
5168 @section PHDRS Command
5169 @kindex PHDRS
5170 @cindex program headers
5171 @cindex ELF program headers
5172 @cindex program segments
5173 @cindex segments, ELF
5174 The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5175 @dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5176 loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5177 program with the @samp{-p} option.
5178
5179 When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5180 reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5181 program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5182 This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5183 interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5184
5185 The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5186 in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5187 precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5188 the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5189 not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5190
5191 The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5192 generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5193 ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5194
5195 This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5196 @code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5197
5198 @smallexample
5199 @group
5200 PHDRS
5201 @{
5202 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5203 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5204 @}
5205 @end group
5206 @end smallexample
5207
5208 The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5209 of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5210 header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5211 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5212 must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5213 is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
5214
5215 Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5216 system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5217 specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5218 sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5219 attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5220 Section Phdr}.
5221
5222 It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5223 merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5224 repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5225 contain the section.
5226
5227 If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5228 then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5229 not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5230 convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5231 placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5232 default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5233 segment at all.
5234
5235 @kindex FILEHDR
5236 @kindex PHDRS
5237 You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
5238 the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5239 The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5240 file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5241 include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
5242 segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5243 these keywords.
5244
5245 The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5246 value of the keyword.
5247
5248 @table @asis
5249 @item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5250 Indicates an unused program header.
5251
5252 @item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5253 Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5254 the file.
5255
5256 @item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5257 Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5258
5259 @item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5260 Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5261 found.
5262
5263 @item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5264 Indicates a segment holding note information.
5265
5266 @item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5267 A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5268 ABI.
5269
5270 @item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5271 Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5272
5273 @item @var{expression}
5274 An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5275 be used for types not defined above.
5276 @end table
5277
5278 You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5279 in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5280 @code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5281 Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5282 output section attribute.
5283
5284 The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5285 which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5286 explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5287 an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5288 header.
5289
5290 Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5291 headers used on a native ELF system.
5292
5293 @example
5294 @group
5295 PHDRS
5296 @{
5297 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5298 interp PT_INTERP ;
5299 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5300 data PT_LOAD ;
5301 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5302 @}
5303
5304 SECTIONS
5305 @{
5306 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5307 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5308 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5309 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5310 @dots{}
5311 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5312 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5313 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5314 @dots{}
5315 @}
5316 @end group
5317 @end example
5318
5319 @node VERSION
5320 @section VERSION Command
5321 @kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5322 @cindex symbol versions
5323 @cindex version script
5324 @cindex versions of symbols
5325 The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5326 only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5327 symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5328 a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5329 shared library.
5330
5331 You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5332 you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5333 also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5334
5335 The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5336 @smallexample
5337 VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5338 @end smallexample
5339
5340 The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5341 Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5342 version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5343 version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5344 version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5345 scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5346 library.
5347
5348 The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5349 examples.
5350
5351 @smallexample
5352 VERS_1.1 @{
5353 global:
5354 foo1;
5355 local:
5356 old*;
5357 original*;
5358 new*;
5359 @};
5360
5361 VERS_1.2 @{
5362 foo2;
5363 @} VERS_1.1;
5364
5365 VERS_2.0 @{
5366 bar1; bar2;
5367 extern "C++" @{
5368 ns::*;
5369 "f(int, double)";
5370 @};
5371 @} VERS_1.2;
5372 @end smallexample
5373
5374 This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5375 version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5376 The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5377 a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
5378 of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5379 symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5380 is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5381 in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
5382 However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5383 name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
5384
5385 Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5386 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5387 to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5388
5389 Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5390 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5391 and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5392
5393 When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5394 specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5395 unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
5396 unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
5397 somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5398 wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5399 wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5400 set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5401 ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
5402
5403 The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5404 they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5405 could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5406 However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5407
5408 Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
5409 in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5410 symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5411 won't.
5412
5413 @smallexample
5414 @{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
5415 @end smallexample
5416
5417 When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5418 symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5419 requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5420 shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5421 loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5422 linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5423 application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5424 way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5425 all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5426 search for each symbol reference.
5427
5428 The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5429 doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5430 that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5431 functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5432 the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5433 required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5434 that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5435 versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5436 the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5437
5438 There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5439 first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5440 source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5441 script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5442 maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5443 @smallexample
5444 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5445 @end smallexample
5446 @noindent
5447 in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5448 be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5449 The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
5450 @samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5451 takes precedence over a version script.
5452
5453 The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5454 function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5455 an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5456 version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5457 linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5458
5459 To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5460 source file. Here is an example:
5461
5462 @smallexample
5463 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5464 __asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5465 __asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5466 __asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5467 @end smallexample
5468
5469 In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5470 unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5471 example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5472 @samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5473
5474 When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5475 some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5476 this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5477 @samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5478 declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5479 you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5480
5481 If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5482 within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
5483 (i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
5484 specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5485
5486 You can also specify the language in the version script:
5487
5488 @smallexample
5489 VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5490 @end smallexample
5491
5492 The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
5493 The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5494 demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
5495 patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5496 @samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
5497
5498 Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5499 described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5500 or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5501 the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5502 whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5503 cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5504 might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5505 should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5506 expect when you upgrade.
5507
5508 @node Expressions
5509 @section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5510 @cindex expressions
5511 @cindex arithmetic
5512 The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5513 that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5514 expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5515 host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5516
5517 You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5518
5519 The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5520 expressions.
5521
5522 @menu
5523 * Constants:: Constants
5524 * Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
5525 * Symbols:: Symbol Names
5526 * Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
5527 * Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5528 * Operators:: Operators
5529 * Evaluation:: Evaluation
5530 * Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5531 * Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5532 @end menu
5533
5534 @node Constants
5535 @subsection Constants
5536 @cindex integer notation
5537 @cindex constants in linker scripts
5538 All constants are integers.
5539
5540 As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5541 octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
5542 hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
5543 @samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
5544 @samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5545 value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
5546
5547 @cindex scaled integers
5548 @cindex K and M integer suffixes
5549 @cindex M and K integer suffixes
5550 @cindex suffixes for integers
5551 @cindex integer suffixes
5552 In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5553 constant by
5554 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5555 @ifnottex
5556 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5557 @code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5558 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5559 @end ifnottex
5560 @tex
5561 ${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5562 @end tex
5563 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5564 respectively. For example, the following
5565 all refer to the same quantity:
5566
5567 @smallexample
5568 _fourk_1 = 4K;
5569 _fourk_2 = 4096;
5570 _fourk_3 = 0x1000;
5571 _fourk_4 = 10000o;
5572 @end smallexample
5573
5574 Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5575 conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5576
5577 @node Symbolic Constants
5578 @subsection Symbolic Constants
5579 @cindex symbolic constants
5580 @kindex CONSTANT
5581 It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5582 the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5583
5584 @table @code
5585 @item MAXPAGESIZE
5586 @kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5587 The target's maximum page size.
5588
5589 @item COMMONPAGESIZE
5590 @kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5591 The target's default page size.
5592 @end table
5593
5594 So for example:
5595
5596 @smallexample
5597 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
5598 @end smallexample
5599
5600 will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5601 supported by the target.
5602
5603 @node Symbols
5604 @subsection Symbol Names
5605 @cindex symbol names
5606 @cindex names
5607 @cindex quoted symbol names
5608 @kindex "
5609 Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5610 and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5611 Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5612 specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5613 keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5614 @smallexample
5615 "SECTION" = 9;
5616 "with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
5617 @end smallexample
5618
5619 Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5620 to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5621 whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5622
5623 @node Orphan Sections
5624 @subsection Orphan Sections
5625 @cindex orphan
5626 Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5627 are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5628 script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5629 output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5630 placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5631 attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5632 same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5633 If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5634 at the end of the file.
5635
5636 For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5637 well as section flag.
5638
5639 The command line options @samp{--orphan-handling} and @samp{--unique}
5640 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}) can be used to control which
5641 output sections an orphan is placed in.
5642
5643 If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
5644 the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
5645 __start_SECNAME and __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
5646 section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5647 orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5648 representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5649 character.
5650
5651 @node Location Counter
5652 @subsection The Location Counter
5653 @kindex .
5654 @cindex dot
5655 @cindex location counter
5656 @cindex current output location
5657 The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5658 current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5659 location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5660 within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5661 anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5662
5663 @cindex holes
5664 Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5665 moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
5666 location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5667 and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5668 doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
5669
5670 @smallexample
5671 SECTIONS
5672 @{
5673 output :
5674 @{
5675 file1(.text)
5676 . = . + 1000;
5677 file2(.text)
5678 . += 1000;
5679 file3(.text)
5680 @} = 0x12345678;
5681 @}
5682 @end smallexample
5683 @noindent
5684 In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5685 located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5686 followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5687 @file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
5688 @samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
5689 specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5690
5691 @cindex dot inside sections
5692 Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5693 current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
5694 statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5695 absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5696 however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5697 not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5698
5699 @smallexample
5700 SECTIONS
5701 @{
5702 . = 0x100
5703 .text: @{
5704 *(.text)
5705 . = 0x200
5706 @}
5707 . = 0x500
5708 .data: @{
5709 *(.data)
5710 . += 0x600
5711 @}
5712 @}
5713 @end smallexample
5714
5715 The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5716 and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5717 the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5718 much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5719 move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5720 and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5721 the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5722 the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5723
5724 @cindex dot outside sections
5725 Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5726 output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5727 needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5728
5729 @smallexample
5730 SECTIONS
5731 @{
5732 start_of_text = . ;
5733 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5734 end_of_text = . ;
5735
5736 start_of_data = . ;
5737 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5738 end_of_data = . ;
5739 @}
5740 @end smallexample
5741
5742 If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5743 not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5744 between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5745 should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5746 blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5747 the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5748 sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5749 statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5750 special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5751 place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5752 as follows:
5753
5754 @smallexample
5755 SECTIONS
5756 @{
5757 start_of_text = . ;
5758 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5759 end_of_text = . ;
5760
5761 start_of_data = . ;
5762 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5763 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5764 end_of_data = . ;
5765 @}
5766 @end smallexample
5767
5768 This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5769 @code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5770 placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5771 assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5772 a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5773 section. So you could write:
5774
5775 @smallexample
5776 SECTIONS
5777 @{
5778 start_of_text = . ;
5779 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5780 end_of_text = . ;
5781
5782 . = . ;
5783 start_of_data = . ;
5784 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5785 end_of_data = . ;
5786 @}
5787 @end smallexample
5788
5789 Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5790 @code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5791
5792 @need 2000
5793 @node Operators
5794 @subsection Operators
5795 @cindex operators for arithmetic
5796 @cindex arithmetic operators
5797 @cindex precedence in expressions
5798 The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5799 the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5800 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5801 @ifnottex
5802 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5803 @smallexample
5804 precedence associativity Operators Notes
5805 (highest)
5806 1 left ! - ~ (1)
5807 2 left * / %
5808 3 left + -
5809 4 left >> <<
5810 5 left == != > < <= >=
5811 6 left &
5812 7 left |
5813 8 left &&
5814 9 left ||
5815 10 right ? :
5816 11 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5817 (lowest)
5818 @end smallexample
5819 Notes:
5820 (1) Prefix operators
5821 (2) @xref{Assignments}.
5822 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5823 @end ifnottex
5824 @tex
5825 \vskip \baselineskip
5826 %"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5827 \hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5828 \hrule
5829 \halign
5830 {\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5831 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5832 &Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5833 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5834 \noalign{\hrule}
5835 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5836 &highest&&&&&\cr
5837 % '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
5838 &1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
5839 &2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5840 &3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5841 &4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5842 &5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5843 &6&&left&&\&&\cr
5844 &7&&left&&|&\cr
5845 &8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5846 &9&&left&&||&\cr
5847 &10&&right&&? :&\cr
5848 &11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5849 &lowest&&&&&\cr
5850 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5851 \hrule}
5852 @end tex
5853 @iftex
5854 {
5855 @obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5856 @dag@quad Prefix operators.
5857 @ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5858 }
5859 @end iftex
5860 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5861
5862 @node Evaluation
5863 @subsection Evaluation
5864 @cindex lazy evaluation
5865 @cindex expression evaluation order
5866 The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5867 an expression when absolutely necessary.
5868
5869 The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5870 address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5871 regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5872 as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5873
5874 However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5875 until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5876 other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5877 for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5878
5879 The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5880 assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5881 allocation.
5882
5883 Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5884 @samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5885
5886 If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5887 available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5888 following
5889 @smallexample
5890 @group
5891 SECTIONS
5892 @{
5893 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
5894 @{ *(.text) @}
5895 @}
5896 @end group
5897 @end smallexample
5898 @noindent
5899 will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5900 address}.
5901
5902 @node Expression Section
5903 @subsection The Section of an Expression
5904 @cindex expression sections
5905 @cindex absolute expressions
5906 @cindex relative expressions
5907 @cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5908 @cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5909 @cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
5910 Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
5911 relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
5912 using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
5913 value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
5914 symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
5915 operations.
5916
5917 Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
5918 section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
5919 address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
5920 @code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
5921 functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
5922 One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
5923 (@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5924 differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
5925 versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
5926 section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
5927 Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
5928 absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
5929 given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
5930 everywhere.
5931
5932 In the following simple example,
5933
5934 @smallexample
5935 @group
5936 SECTIONS
5937 @{
5938 . = 0x100;
5939 __executable_start = 0x100;
5940 .data :
5941 @{
5942 . = 0x10;
5943 __data_start = 0x10;
5944 *(.data)
5945 @}
5946 @dots{}
5947 @}
5948 @end group
5949 @end smallexample
5950
5951 both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
5952 address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
5953 @code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
5954 section in the second two assignments.
5955
5956 For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
5957 addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
5958
5959 @itemize @bullet
5960 @item
5961 Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
5962 operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
5963 absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
5964 @item
5965 Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
5966 relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
5967 and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
5968 @item
5969 Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
5970 in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
5971 address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
5972 before applying the operator.
5973 @end itemize
5974
5975 The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
5976
5977 @itemize @bullet
5978 @item
5979 An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
5980 @item
5981 The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
5982 @item
5983 The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
5984 relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
5985 (after above conversions) is also a number.
5986 @item
5987 The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
5988 relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
5989 section as the relative operand(s).
5990 @item
5991 The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
5992 conversions) is an absolute address.
5993 @end itemize
5994
5995 You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5996 to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5997 create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5998 section @samp{.data}:
5999 @smallexample
6000 SECTIONS
6001 @{
6002 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
6003 @}
6004 @end smallexample
6005 @noindent
6006 If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
6007 @samp{.data} section.
6008
6009 Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
6010 particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
6011
6012 @node Builtin Functions
6013 @subsection Builtin Functions
6014 @cindex functions in expressions
6015 The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
6016 use in linker script expressions.
6017
6018 @table @code
6019 @item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6020 @kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6021 @cindex expression, absolute
6022 Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
6023 of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
6024 value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
6025 normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
6026
6027 @item ADDR(@var{section})
6028 @kindex ADDR(@var{section})
6029 @cindex section address in expression
6030 Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
6031 script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
6032 the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
6033 @code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
6034 @code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
6035 the other two will be absolute:
6036 @smallexample
6037 @group
6038 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6039 .output1 :
6040 @{
6041 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
6042 @dots{}
6043 @}
6044 .output :
6045 @{
6046 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
6047 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
6048 @}
6049 @dots{} @}
6050 @end group
6051 @end smallexample
6052
6053 @item ALIGN(@var{align})
6054 @itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6055 @kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
6056 @kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6057 @cindex round up location counter
6058 @cindex align location counter
6059 @cindex round up expression
6060 @cindex align expression
6061 Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
6062 to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
6063 doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
6064 arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
6065 expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
6066 equivalent to @code{ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), @var{align})}).
6067
6068 Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
6069 next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
6070 variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
6071 input sections:
6072 @smallexample
6073 @group
6074 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6075 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
6076 *(.data)
6077 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
6078 @}
6079 @dots{} @}
6080 @end group
6081 @end smallexample
6082 @noindent
6083 The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
6084 a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
6085 a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
6086 of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
6087
6088 The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6089
6090 @item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6091 @kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6092 @cindex section alignment
6093 Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6094 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6095 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6096 the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6097 value in that section.
6098 @smallexample
6099 @group
6100 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6101 .output @{
6102 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6103 @dots{}
6104 @}
6105 @dots{} @}
6106 @end group
6107 @end smallexample
6108
6109 @item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6110 @kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6111 This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6112 scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6113 section.
6114
6115 @item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6116 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6117 This is equivalent to either
6118 @smallexample
6119 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6120 @end smallexample
6121 or
6122 @smallexample
6123 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize})
6124 + ((. + @var{commonpagesize} - 1) & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
6125 @end smallexample
6126 @noindent
6127 depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6128 for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6129 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6130 If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6131 memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6132 bytes in the on-disk file.
6133
6134 This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6135 any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6136 @var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
6137 be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
6138 working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
6139
6140 @noindent
6141 Example:
6142 @smallexample
6143 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6144 @end smallexample
6145
6146 @item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6147 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6148 This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6149 evaluation purposes.
6150
6151 @smallexample
6152 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6153 @end smallexample
6154
6155 @item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6156 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6157 This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
6158 @samp{-z relro} option is used.
6159 When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6160 does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
6161 @var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
6162 boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
6163 it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
6164 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6165 padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6166 section alignment.
6167
6168 @smallexample
6169 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6170 @end smallexample
6171
6172 @item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6173 @kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6174 @cindex symbol defaults
6175 Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
6176 defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6177 return 0. You can use this function to provide
6178 default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6179 shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6180 the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6181 existed, its value is preserved:
6182
6183 @smallexample
6184 @group
6185 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6186 .text : @{
6187 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6188 @dots{}
6189 @}
6190 @dots{}
6191 @}
6192 @end group
6193 @end smallexample
6194
6195 @item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6196 @kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6197 Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6198
6199 @item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6200 @kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6201 @cindex section load address in expression
6202 Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
6203 Section LMA}).
6204
6205 @item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6206 @kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6207 Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6208 @code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6209
6210 @kindex MAX
6211 @item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6212 Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6213
6214 @kindex MIN
6215 @item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6216 Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6217
6218 @item NEXT(@var{exp})
6219 @kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6220 @cindex unallocated address, next
6221 Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6222 This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6223 use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6224 output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6225
6226 @item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6227 @kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6228 Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6229
6230 @item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6231 @kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6232 Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
6233 value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6234 @samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6235 will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6236 can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
6237 ``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
6238 name.
6239
6240 @item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6241 @kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6242 @cindex section size
6243 Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6244 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6245 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6246 @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6247 @smallexample
6248 @group
6249 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6250 .output @{
6251 .start = . ;
6252 @dots{}
6253 .end = . ;
6254 @}
6255 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6256 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6257 @dots{} @}
6258 @end group
6259 @end smallexample
6260
6261 @item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6262 @itemx sizeof_headers
6263 @kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6264 @cindex header size
6265 Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6266 information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6267 this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6268 choose, to facilitate paging.
6269
6270 @cindex not enough room for program headers
6271 @cindex program headers, not enough room
6272 When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6273 @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6274 number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6275 addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6276 additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6277 room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6278 the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6279 script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6280 you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6281 command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6282 @end table
6283
6284 @node Implicit Linker Scripts
6285 @section Implicit Linker Scripts
6286 @cindex implicit linker scripts
6287 If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6288 an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6289 linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6290 linker will report an error.
6291
6292 An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6293
6294 Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6295 assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6296 commands.
6297
6298 Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6299 at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6300 read. This can affect archive searching.
6301
6302 @ifset GENERIC
6303 @node Machine Dependent
6304 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
6305
6306 @cindex machine dependencies
6307 @command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6308 sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
6309 functionality are not listed.
6310
6311 @menu
6312 @ifset H8300
6313 * H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6314 @end ifset
6315 @ifset I960
6316 * i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
6317 @end ifset
6318 @ifset M68HC11
6319 * M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6320 @end ifset
6321 @ifset ARM
6322 * ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6323 @end ifset
6324 @ifset HPPA
6325 * HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6326 @end ifset
6327 @ifset M68K
6328 * M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6329 @end ifset
6330 @ifset MIPS
6331 * MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6332 @end ifset
6333 @ifset MMIX
6334 * MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
6335 @end ifset
6336 @ifset MSP430
6337 * MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
6338 @end ifset
6339 @ifset NDS32
6340 * NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6341 @end ifset
6342 @ifset NIOSII
6343 * Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6344 @end ifset
6345 @ifset POWERPC
6346 * PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6347 @end ifset
6348 @ifset POWERPC64
6349 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6350 @end ifset
6351 @ifset SPU
6352 * SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6353 @end ifset
6354 @ifset TICOFF
6355 * TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
6356 @end ifset
6357 @ifset WIN32
6358 * WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6359 @end ifset
6360 @ifset XTENSA
6361 * Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6362 @end ifset
6363 @end menu
6364 @end ifset
6365
6366 @ifset H8300
6367 @ifclear GENERIC
6368 @raisesections
6369 @end ifclear
6370
6371 @node H8/300
6372 @section @command{ld} and the H8/300
6373
6374 @cindex H8/300 support
6375 For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
6376 you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6377
6378 @table @emph
6379 @cindex relaxing on H8/300
6380 @item relaxing address modes
6381 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6382 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6383 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6384 respectively.
6385
6386 @cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6387 @item synthesizing instructions
6388 @c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
6389 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
6390 sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6391 page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6392 (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6393 @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6394 top page of memory).
6395
6396 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6397 indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6398 displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6399 the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6400 @code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6401 whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6402 range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6403
6404 @item bit manipulation instructions
6405 @command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
6406 biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
6407 which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6408 page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6409 (That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
6410 @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6411 the top page of memory).
6412
6413 @item system control instructions
6414 @command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
6415 32 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
6416 changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6417 (That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
6418 @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6419 the top page of memory).
6420 @end table
6421
6422 @ifclear GENERIC
6423 @lowersections
6424 @end ifclear
6425 @end ifset
6426
6427 @ifclear GENERIC
6428 @ifset Renesas
6429 @c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
6430 @c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6431 @node Renesas
6432 @chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
6433
6434 @command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6435 H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6436 options are required for these chips.
6437 @end ifset
6438 @end ifclear
6439
6440 @ifset I960
6441 @ifclear GENERIC
6442 @raisesections
6443 @end ifclear
6444
6445 @node i960
6446 @section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6447
6448 @cindex i960 support
6449
6450 You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6451 specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6452 family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6453 incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6454 linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6455 libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6456 search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6457
6458 For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6459 well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6460 paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6461 the names
6462
6463 @smallexample
6464 @group
6465 try
6466 libtry.a
6467 tryca
6468 libtryca.a
6469 @end group
6470 @end smallexample
6471
6472 @noindent
6473 The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6474 two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6475
6476 You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6477 the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6478 use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6479 specifies a library.
6480
6481 @cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6482 @cindex relaxing on i960
6483 @command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6484 you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6485 @code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6486 them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6487 instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6488 instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6489 target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6490 not itself call any subroutines).
6491
6492 @ifclear GENERIC
6493 @lowersections
6494 @end ifclear
6495 @end ifset
6496
6497 @ifset ARM
6498 @ifclear GENERIC
6499 @raisesections
6500 @end ifclear
6501
6502 @ifset M68HC11
6503 @ifclear GENERIC
6504 @raisesections
6505 @end ifclear
6506
6507 @node M68HC11/68HC12
6508 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6509
6510 @cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6511
6512 @subsection Linker Relaxation
6513
6514 For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6515 optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6516
6517 @table @emph
6518 @cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6519 @item relaxing address modes
6520 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6521 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6522 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6523 respectively.
6524
6525 @command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6526 transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6527 page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6528
6529 @item relaxing gcc instruction group
6530 When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6531 of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6532 addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6533 @code{bset} instructions.
6534
6535 @end table
6536
6537 @subsection Trampoline Generation
6538
6539 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6540 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6541 For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6542 call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
6543 will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
6544 trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6545 case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6546 point to the function trampoline.
6547
6548 @ifclear GENERIC
6549 @lowersections
6550 @end ifclear
6551 @end ifset
6552
6553 @node ARM
6554 @section @command{ld} and the ARM family
6555
6556 @cindex ARM interworking support
6557 @kindex --support-old-code
6558 For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
6559 between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
6560 been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6561 line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6562 libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6563 option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6564 given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6565 which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6566 the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6567 non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6568
6569 @cindex thumb entry point
6570 @cindex entry point, thumb
6571 @kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6572 The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6573 @samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6574 But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6575 branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6576 executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6577
6578 @cindex PE import table prefixing
6579 @kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6580 The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6581 the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
6582 element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
6583 import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6584
6585 @cindex BE8
6586 @kindex --be8
6587 The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6588 executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
6589 objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
6590 option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
6591 little-endian code.
6592
6593 @cindex TARGET1
6594 @kindex --target1-rel
6595 @kindex --target1-abs
6596 The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6597 @samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6598 or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6599 and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6600
6601 @cindex TARGET2
6602 @kindex --target2=@var{type}
6603 The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6604 @samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6605 meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6606 @table @samp
6607 @item rel
6608 @samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6609 @item abs
6610 @samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
6611 @item got-rel
6612 @samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6613 @end table
6614
6615 @cindex FIX_V4BX
6616 @kindex --fix-v4bx
6617 The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6618 specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6619 interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6620 also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6621
6622 In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6623 linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6624 @code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6625
6626 In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6627 relocations are ignored.
6628
6629 @cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6630 @kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6631 Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6632 relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6633
6634 @smallexample
6635 TST rM, #1
6636 MOVEQ PC, rM
6637 BX Rn
6638 @end smallexample
6639
6640 This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6641 and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
6642 condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
6643
6644 @cindex USE_BLX
6645 @kindex --use-blx
6646 The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6647 BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6648 situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6649 code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6650 each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6651
6652 This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6653 specify it if you are using that target.
6654
6655 @cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6656 @kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6657 The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6658 bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6659 instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6660 to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6661 the support code can read the intended values.
6662
6663 The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6664 intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6665 and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6666 intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6667 full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6668 you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6669
6670 If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6671 enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6672 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6673 mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6674 vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6675 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6676
6677 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6678 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6679 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6680 first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6681 instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6682 the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6683 are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6684
6685 @cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6686 @kindex --fix-arm1176
6687 @kindex --no-fix-arm1176
6688 The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6689 in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6690 are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
6691 unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6692
6693 Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
6694 Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
6695 http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6696
6697 @cindex STM32L4xx erratum workaround
6698 @kindex --fix-stm32l4xx-629360
6699
6700 The @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360} switch enables a link-time
6701 workaround for a bug in the bus matrix / memory controller for some of
6702 the STM32 Cortex-M4 based products (STM32L4xx). When accessing
6703 off-chip memory via the affected bus for bus reads of 9 words or more,
6704 the bus can generate corrupt data and/or abort. These are only
6705 core-initiated accesses (not DMA), and might affect any access:
6706 integer loads such as LDM, POP and floating-point loads such as VLDM,
6707 VPOP. Stores are not affected.
6708
6709 The bug can be avoided by splitting memory accesses into the
6710 necessary chunks to keep bus reads below 8 words.
6711
6712 The workaround is not enabled by default, this is equivalent to use
6713 @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=none}. If you know you are using buggy
6714 STM32L4xx hardware, you can enable the workaround by specifying the
6715 linker option @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360}, or the equivalent
6716 @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=default}.
6717
6718 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6719 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6720 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists in a
6721 replacement sequence emulating the behaviour of the original one and a
6722 branch back to the subsequent instruction. The original instruction is
6723 then replaced with a branch to the veneer.
6724
6725 The workaround does not always preserve the memory access order for
6726 the LDMDB instruction, when the instruction loads the PC.
6727
6728 The workaround is not able to handle problematic instructions when
6729 they are in the middle of an IT block, since a branch is not allowed
6730 there. In that case, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6731 occurs.
6732
6733 The workaround is not able to replace problematic instructions with a
6734 PC-relative branch instruction if the @samp{.text} section is too
6735 large. In that case, when the branch that replaces the original code
6736 cannot be encoded, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6737 occurs.
6738
6739 @cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6740 @kindex --no-enum-size-warning
6741 The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6742 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6743 enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6744 linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6745 using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6746 not be diagnosed.
6747
6748 @cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6749 @kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6750 The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6751 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6752 @code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6753 linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6754 using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
6755
6756 @cindex PIC_VENEER
6757 @kindex --pic-veneer
6758 The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6759 ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6760 is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6761 @samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6762
6763 @cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6764 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6765 The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6766 code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6767 perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6768 placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6769 controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6770 The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
6771 duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
6772 group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6773 code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6774 where they should be placed.
6775
6776 The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6777 @option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
6778 placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
6779 branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6780 placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6781 value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6782 exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6783 A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6784 linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6785 from the input sections.
6786
6787 The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6788 @samp{N = +1}.
6789
6790 Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6791 only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6792 otherwise.
6793
6794 @cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6795 @kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6796 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6797 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6798
6799 The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
6800
6801 @cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
6802 @kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
6803 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
6804 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
6805
6806 Please contact ARM for further details.
6807
6808 @kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6809 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6810 @cindex Merging exidx entries
6811 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6812
6813 @kindex --long-plt
6814 @cindex 32-bit PLT entries
6815 The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
6816 which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
6817 entries which only support 512Mb of code.
6818
6819 @ifclear GENERIC
6820 @lowersections
6821 @end ifclear
6822 @end ifset
6823
6824 @ifset HPPA
6825 @ifclear GENERIC
6826 @raisesections
6827 @end ifclear
6828
6829 @node HPPA ELF32
6830 @section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6831 @cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6832 @kindex --multi-subspace
6833 When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6834 import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6835 The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6836 stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6837 multiple sub-spaces.
6838
6839 @cindex HPPA stub grouping
6840 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6841 Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6842 stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6843 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6844 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6845 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6846 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6847 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6848 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6849 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6850 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6851 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6852 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6853 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6854 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6855
6856 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6857 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6858 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6859 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6860
6861 @ifclear GENERIC
6862 @lowersections
6863 @end ifclear
6864 @end ifset
6865
6866 @ifset M68K
6867 @ifclear GENERIC
6868 @raisesections
6869 @end ifclear
6870
6871 @node M68K
6872 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6873
6874 @cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6875 @kindex --got=@var{type}
6876 The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6877 The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6878 @samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6879 the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6880 @samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6881 entries only at non-negative offsets.
6882 @samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6883 entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6884 support such GOTs.
6885 @samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6886 output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6887 file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6888 files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
6889
6890 @ifclear GENERIC
6891 @lowersections
6892 @end ifclear
6893 @end ifset
6894
6895 @ifset MIPS
6896 @ifclear GENERIC
6897 @raisesections
6898 @end ifclear
6899
6900 @node MIPS
6901 @section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6902
6903 @cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
6904 @kindex --insn32
6905 @kindex --no-insn32
6906 The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
6907 microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
6908 in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
6909 used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
6910 or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
6911 including 16-bit ones where possible.
6912
6913 @ifclear GENERIC
6914 @lowersections
6915 @end ifclear
6916 @end ifset
6917
6918 @ifset MMIX
6919 @ifclear GENERIC
6920 @raisesections
6921 @end ifclear
6922
6923 @node MMIX
6924 @section @code{ld} and MMIX
6925 For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
6926 @code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
6927 understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
6928 can translate between the two formats.
6929
6930 There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
6931 Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
6932 registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
6933 equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
6934 @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
6935 global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
6936 this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
6937 symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
6938
6939 Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
6940 @code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
6941 The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
6942 of a section.
6943
6944 Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
6945 are left out from an mmo file.
6946
6947 @ifclear GENERIC
6948 @lowersections
6949 @end ifclear
6950 @end ifset
6951
6952 @ifset MSP430
6953 @ifclear GENERIC
6954 @raisesections
6955 @end ifclear
6956
6957 @node MSP430
6958 @section @code{ld} and MSP430
6959 For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
6960 will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
6961 just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
6962
6963 @cindex MSP430 extra sections
6964 The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
6965
6966 @table @code
6967 @item @samp{.vectors}
6968 Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
6969
6970 @item @samp{.bootloader}
6971 Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
6972 in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6973
6974 @item @samp{.infomem}
6975 Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
6976 this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6977
6978 @item @samp{.infomemnobits}
6979 This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
6980 in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
6981
6982 @item @samp{.noinit}
6983 Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
6984
6985 The last two sections are used by gcc.
6986 @end table
6987
6988 @ifclear GENERIC
6989 @lowersections
6990 @end ifclear
6991 @end ifset
6992
6993 @ifset NDS32
6994 @ifclear GENERIC
6995 @raisesections
6996 @end ifclear
6997
6998 @node NDS32
6999 @section @code{ld} and NDS32
7000 @kindex relaxing on NDS32
7001 For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
7002 relaxes objects according to these options.
7003
7004 @table @code
7005 @item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
7006 Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
7007
7008 @item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
7009 Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
7010
7011 @item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
7012 Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
7013
7014 @item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
7015 Export the EX9 table after linking.
7016
7017 @item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
7018 Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
7019
7020 @item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
7021 Update the existing EX9 table.
7022
7023 @item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
7024 Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
7025
7026 @item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
7027 Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
7028
7029 @item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
7030 Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
7031
7032 @item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
7033 Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
7034 @end table
7035
7036 @ifclear GENERIC
7037 @lowersections
7038 @end ifclear
7039 @end ifset
7040
7041 @ifset NIOSII
7042 @ifclear GENERIC
7043 @raisesections
7044 @end ifclear
7045
7046 @node Nios II
7047 @section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
7048 @cindex Nios II call relaxation
7049 @kindex --relax on Nios II
7050
7051 Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
7052 transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
7053 which may result in @command{ld} giving
7054 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7055 The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
7056 trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
7057 outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
7058 trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
7059 be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
7060 larger than 256MB.
7061
7062 The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
7063 is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
7064 @option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
7065 locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
7066 source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
7067 register as a temporary.
7068
7069 Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
7070 relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
7071 option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
7072
7073 @ifclear GENERIC
7074 @lowersections
7075 @end ifclear
7076 @end ifset
7077
7078 @ifset POWERPC
7079 @ifclear GENERIC
7080 @raisesections
7081 @end ifclear
7082
7083 @node PowerPC ELF32
7084 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
7085 @cindex PowerPC long branches
7086 @kindex --relax on PowerPC
7087 Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
7088 displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
7089 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7090 @samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
7091 the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
7092 section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
7093 section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
7094 @samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
7095 both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
7096 considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
7097
7098 @cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
7099 @table @option
7100 @cindex PowerPC PLT
7101 @kindex --bss-plt
7102 @item --bss-plt
7103 Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
7104 generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
7105 the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
7106 writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
7107 @command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
7108 PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
7109 compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
7110 BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
7111
7112 @kindex --secure-plt
7113 @item --secure-plt
7114 @command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
7115 @samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
7116 when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
7117 layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
7118 style BSS PLT.
7119
7120 @cindex PowerPC GOT
7121 @kindex --sdata-got
7122 @item --sdata-got
7123 The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
7124 sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
7125 @code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
7126 section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
7127 @code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
7128 @code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
7129 @samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
7130 @code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7131 PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7132 pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7133 GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7134 really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7135
7136 @cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7137 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7138 @item --emit-stub-syms
7139 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7140 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7141
7142 @cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7143 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
7144 @item --no-tls-optimize
7145 PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7146 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7147 disable the optimization.
7148 @end table
7149
7150 @ifclear GENERIC
7151 @lowersections
7152 @end ifclear
7153 @end ifset
7154
7155 @ifset POWERPC64
7156 @ifclear GENERIC
7157 @raisesections
7158 @end ifclear
7159
7160 @node PowerPC64 ELF64
7161 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7162
7163 @cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7164 @table @option
7165 @cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7166 @kindex --stub-group-size
7167 @item --stub-group-size
7168 Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7169 by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7170 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7171 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7172 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7173 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7174 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7175 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7176 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7177 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7178 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7179 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7180 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7181 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7182
7183 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7184 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7185 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7186 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7187
7188 @cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7189 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7190 @item --emit-stub-syms
7191 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7192 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7193
7194 @cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7195 @kindex --dotsyms
7196 @kindex --no-dotsyms
7197 @item --dotsyms
7198 @itemx --no-dotsyms
7199 These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7200 in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7201 function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7202 code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7203 properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7204 to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7205 @samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7206 dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7207 feature.
7208
7209 @cindex PowerPC64 register save/restore functions
7210 @kindex --save-restore-funcs
7211 @kindex --no-save-restore-funcs
7212 @item --save-restore-funcs
7213 @itemx --no-save-restore-funcs
7214 These two options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} automatically
7215 provides out-of-line register save and restore functions used by
7216 @samp{-Os} code. The default is to provide any such referenced
7217 function for a normal final link, and to not do so for a relocatable
7218 link.
7219
7220 @cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7221 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
7222 @item --no-tls-optimize
7223 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7224 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7225 disable the optimization.
7226
7227 @cindex PowerPC64 __tls_get_addr optimization
7228 @kindex --tls-get-addr-optimize
7229 @kindex --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7230 @item --tls-get-addr-optimize
7231 @itemx --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7232 These options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} uses a special
7233 stub to call __tls_get_addr. PowerPC64 glibc 2.22 and later support
7234 an optimization that allows the second and subsequent calls to
7235 @code{__tls_get_addr} for a given symbol to be resolved by the special
7236 stub without calling in to glibc. By default the linker enables this
7237 option when glibc advertises the availability of __tls_get_addr_opt.
7238 Forcing this option on when using an older glibc won't do much besides
7239 slow down your applications, but may be useful if linking an
7240 application against an older glibc with the expectation that it will
7241 normally be used on systems having a newer glibc.
7242
7243 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7244 @kindex --no-opd-optimize
7245 @item --no-opd-optimize
7246 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7247 corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
7248 the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
7249 Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7250
7251 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7252 @kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7253 @item --non-overlapping-opd
7254 Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7255 @code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7256 the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7257 entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7258
7259 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7260 @kindex --no-toc-optimize
7261 @item --no-toc-optimize
7262 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7263 entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7264 reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7265 marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7266 marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7267 relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7268 unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7269 reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7270 discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7271 reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7272 code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7273 optimization.
7274
7275 @cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7276 @kindex --no-multi-toc
7277 @item --no-multi-toc
7278 If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7279 @code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7280 where TOC
7281 entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7282 total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7283 grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7284 TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7285 calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7286 help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
7287 64K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7288 Use this option to turn off this feature.
7289
7290 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7291 @kindex --no-toc-sort
7292 @item --no-toc-sort
7293 By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7294 happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7295 placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7296 with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7297 referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7298 @code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7299 results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7300 off this feature.
7301
7302 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7303 @kindex --plt-align
7304 @kindex --no-plt-align
7305 @item --plt-align
7306 @itemx --no-plt-align
7307 Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
7308 padded so that they don't cross a 32-byte boundary, or to the
7309 specified power of two boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. Note
7310 that this isn't alignment in the usual sense. By default PLT call
7311 stubs are packed tightly.
7312
7313 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7314 @kindex --plt-static-chain
7315 @kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7316 @item --plt-static-chain
7317 @itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7318 Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7319 chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7320 chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7321
7322 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7323 @kindex --plt-thread-safe
7324 @kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7325 @item --plt-thread-safe
7326 @itemx --no-thread-safe
7327 With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7328 lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7329 another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7330 order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7331 memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7332 barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7333 looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7334 seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7335 default behaviour.
7336 @end table
7337
7338 @ifclear GENERIC
7339 @lowersections
7340 @end ifclear
7341 @end ifset
7342
7343 @ifset SPU
7344 @ifclear GENERIC
7345 @raisesections
7346 @end ifclear
7347
7348 @node SPU ELF
7349 @section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7350
7351 @cindex SPU ELF options
7352 @table @option
7353
7354 @cindex SPU plugins
7355 @kindex --plugin
7356 @item --plugin
7357 This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7358
7359 @cindex SPU overlays
7360 @kindex --no-overlays
7361 @item --no-overlays
7362 Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7363 regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7364 @command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7365 turns off all this special overlay handling.
7366
7367 @cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7368 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7369 @item --emit-stub-syms
7370 This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7371 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7372
7373 @cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7374 @kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7375 @item --extra-overlay-stubs
7376 This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7377 function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7378 on calls to non-overlay regions.
7379
7380 @cindex SPU local store size
7381 @kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7382 @item --local-store=lo:hi
7383 @command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7384 the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7385 range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7386
7387 @cindex SPU
7388 @kindex --stack-analysis
7389 @item --stack-analysis
7390 SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7391 unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7392 under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7393 @command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7394 @command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7395 determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7396 for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7397 for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7398 for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7399 find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7400 and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7401 under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7402 dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7403 is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7404 and calls will be given.
7405
7406 @cindex SPU
7407 @kindex --emit-stack-syms
7408 @item --emit-stack-syms
7409 This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7410 in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7411 These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7412 functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7413 functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7414 such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7415 The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
7416 @code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
7417 @end table
7418
7419 @ifclear GENERIC
7420 @lowersections
7421 @end ifclear
7422 @end ifset
7423
7424 @ifset TICOFF
7425 @ifclear GENERIC
7426 @raisesections
7427 @end ifclear
7428
7429 @node TI COFF
7430 @section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7431 @cindex TI COFF versions
7432 @kindex --format=@var{version}
7433 The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7434 TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7435 also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7436 format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7437 header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7438
7439 @ifclear GENERIC
7440 @lowersections
7441 @end ifclear
7442 @end ifset
7443
7444 @ifset WIN32
7445 @ifclear GENERIC
7446 @raisesections
7447 @end ifclear
7448
7449 @node WIN32
7450 @section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7451
7452 This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
7453 See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
7454 command line options mentioned here.
7455
7456 @table @emph
7457 @cindex import libraries
7458 @item import libraries
7459 The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
7460 libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
7461 regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7462 archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
7463 support for creating such libraries provided with the
7464 @samp{--out-implib} command line option.
7465
7466 @item exporting DLL symbols
7467 @cindex exporting DLL symbols
7468 The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7469
7470 @table @emph
7471 @item using auto-export functionality
7472 @cindex using auto-export functionality
7473 By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7474 which is controlled by the following command line options:
7475
7476 @itemize
7477 @item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7478 @item --exclude-symbols
7479 @item --exclude-libs
7480 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib
7481 @item --version-script
7482 @end itemize
7483
7484 When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7485 (global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7486 symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7487 often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7488 private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
7489 options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
7490 exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7491 final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7492
7493 If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
7494 command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7495 if either of the following are true:
7496
7497 @itemize
7498 @item A DEF file is used.
7499 @item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7500 @end itemize
7501
7502 @item using a DEF file
7503 @cindex using a DEF file
7504 Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7505 an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7506 exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7507 name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
7508 command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
7509
7510 @example
7511 gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7512 @end example
7513
7514 Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7515 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7516
7517 Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7518
7519 @example
7520 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
7521
7522 EXPORTS
7523 foo
7524 bar
7525 _bar = bar
7526 another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7527 var1 DATA
7528 doo = foo == foo2
7529 eoo DATA == var1
7530 @end example
7531
7532 This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
7533 symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7534 alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7535 by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7536 @code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7537 @code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7538 export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7539 in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7540 symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
7541
7542 The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7543 name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7544 the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7545
7546 When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7547 library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
7548 @code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
7549 executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
7550
7551 With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7552 specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
7553 non-default base address for the image.
7554
7555 If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
7556 or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7557 filename specified on the command line.
7558
7559 The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7560
7561 @example
7562 EXPORTS
7563 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7564 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7565 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
7566 @end example
7567
7568 Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7569 @samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7570 @samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7571 @samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7572 Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7573 @samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7574 string in import/export table for the symbol.
7575
7576 The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7577
7578 @code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7579 will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7580 by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7581 linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7582 library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7583
7584 @code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7585 The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7586 the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7587 @code{*_imp__foo}).
7588
7589 @code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7590 well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7591 read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7592 variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7593 the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7594 extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7595 application will behave unexpectedly.
7596
7597 @code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7598 it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7599 symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7600 API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7601 the DLL without an import library.
7602
7603 See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7604 other DEF file statements
7605
7606 @cindex creating a DEF file
7607 While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7608 with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
7609
7610 @item Using decorations
7611 @cindex Using decorations
7612 Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7613 itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7614 declared as:
7615
7616 @example
7617 __declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7618 __declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7619 @end example
7620
7621 All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7622 any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7623 this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7624 the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7625
7626 Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
7627 decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
7628 instead:
7629
7630 @example
7631 __declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7632 __declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7633 @end example
7634
7635 This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7636 when included by the library itself the header must declare the
7637 variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7638 code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
7639 of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
7640 omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7641 @samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
7642 information.
7643 @end table
7644
7645 @cindex automatic data imports
7646 @item automatic data imports
7647 The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
7648 by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
7649 compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
7650 issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
7651 code to these platforms, especially for large
7652 c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
7653 initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
7654 decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
7655 platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
7656 command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7657 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7658 suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7659 trigger the feature's use.
7660
7661 auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
7662 additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7663
7664 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
7665 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7666
7667 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7668 occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7669 One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
7670 below.
7671
7672 @cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
7673 For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7674 object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7675 offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7676 field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7677 in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
7678 without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
7679 The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
7680 references.
7681
7682 The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7683 be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7684 themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7685 runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7686 compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7687 support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
7688 run without error on an older system.
7689
7690 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7691 enabled as needed.
7692
7693 @cindex direct linking to a dll
7694 @item direct linking to a dll
7695 The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7696 including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
7697 libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
7698 traditional import library method, especially when linking large
7699 libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7700 function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7701 though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
7702 storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
7703 tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
7704 large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7705
7706 Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
7707 @samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
7708 of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
7709 perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7710 select the dll instead of an import library.
7711
7712
7713 For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7714 to find, in the first directory of its search path,
7715
7716 @example
7717 libxxx.dll.a
7718 xxx.dll.a
7719 libxxx.a
7720 xxx.lib
7721 cygxxx.dll (*)
7722 libxxx.dll
7723 xxx.dll
7724 @end example
7725
7726 before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7727
7728 (*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7729 where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7730 @samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7731 file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
7732 @samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7733
7734 Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7735 @samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
7736 was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7737 various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7738 could coexist on the same machine.
7739
7740 The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7741 applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
7742 libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
7743
7744 @example
7745 bin/
7746 cygxxx.dll
7747 lib/
7748 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
7749 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
7750 @end example
7751
7752 Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
7753 done two ways:
7754
7755 1. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
7756 @example
7757 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
7758 @end example
7759
7760 However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
7761 (@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
7762 @samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
7763 not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
7764
7765 2. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
7766 directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
7767 should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
7768 making the app/dll.
7769
7770 @example
7771 ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
7772 @end example
7773
7774 Then you can link without any make environment changes.
7775
7776 @example
7777 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
7778 @end example
7779
7780 This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
7781 perfectly legal
7782
7783 @example
7784 bin/
7785 cygxxx-5.dll
7786 lib/
7787 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
7788 @end example
7789
7790 Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
7791 even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
7792 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
7793
7794 Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
7795 wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
7796
7797 1. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
7798 work with auto-imported data.
7799
7800 2. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
7801 import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
7802 symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
7803 for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
7804 possible to do this without an import lib.
7805
7806 3. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
7807 critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
7808 in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
7809 stdcall-decorated assembly names.
7810
7811 So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
7812 true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
7813 a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
7814 binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
7815 massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
7816 requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
7817 will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
7818
7819 @item symbol aliasing
7820 @table @emph
7821 @item adding additional names
7822 Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
7823 A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
7824 exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
7825 when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
7826 import library. Consider the following DEF file:
7827
7828 @example
7829 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7830
7831 EXPORTS
7832 foo
7833 _foo = foo
7834 @end example
7835
7836 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
7837
7838 Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
7839 source code using the "weak" attribute:
7840
7841 @example
7842 void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
7843 void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
7844 @end example
7845
7846 See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
7847 symbols.
7848
7849 @item renaming symbols
7850 Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
7851 kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
7852 @samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
7853 DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
7854 created). In the following example:
7855
7856 @example
7857 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7858
7859 EXPORTS
7860 _foo = foo
7861 @end example
7862
7863 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
7864 @samp{_foo}.
7865 @end table
7866
7867 Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
7868 unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
7869 If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
7870 @emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
7871 that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
7872 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
7873 renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
7874 to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
7875 the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
7876 In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
7877 which is probably not what you wanted.
7878
7879 @cindex weak externals
7880 @item weak externals
7881 The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
7882 weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
7883 defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
7884 are three variants of weak externals:
7885 @itemize
7886 @item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
7887 called lazy externals.
7888 @item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
7889 This form is not presently implemented.
7890 @item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
7891 implemented.
7892 @end itemize
7893 As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
7894 are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
7895 uses a default value.
7896
7897 @cindex aligned common symbols
7898 @item aligned common symbols
7899 As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
7900 desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
7901 the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
7902 carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
7903 by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
7904 tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
7905 but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
7906 warnings about unknown linker directives.
7907
7908 @end table
7909
7910 @ifclear GENERIC
7911 @lowersections
7912 @end ifclear
7913 @end ifset
7914
7915 @ifset XTENSA
7916 @ifclear GENERIC
7917 @raisesections
7918 @end ifclear
7919
7920 @node Xtensa
7921 @section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
7922
7923 @cindex Xtensa processors
7924 The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
7925 @code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
7926 specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
7927 keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
7928 example, with the command:
7929
7930 @smallexample
7931 SECTIONS
7932 @{
7933 .text : @{
7934 *(.literal .text)
7935 @}
7936 @}
7937 @end smallexample
7938
7939 @noindent
7940 @command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
7941 and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
7942 literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
7943 interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
7944 group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
7945 files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
7946 and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
7947
7948 @cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
7949 @cindex relaxing on Xtensa
7950 Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
7951 provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
7952 is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
7953 literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
7954 will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
7955 location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
7956 the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
7957 unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
7958 @code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
7959 range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
7960
7961 For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
7962 to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
7963 instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
7964 instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
7965 instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
7966 @code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
7967 hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
7968 By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
7969 switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
7970 density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
7971 instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
7972 performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
7973 linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
7974 a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
7975
7976 The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
7977 control the linker:
7978
7979 @cindex Xtensa options
7980 @table @option
7981 @item --size-opt
7982 When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
7983 more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
7984 no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
7985 alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
7986 preserve the correctness of the code.
7987 @end table
7988
7989 @ifclear GENERIC
7990 @lowersections
7991 @end ifclear
7992 @end ifset
7993
7994 @ifclear SingleFormat
7995 @node BFD
7996 @chapter BFD
7997
7998 @cindex back end
7999 @cindex object file management
8000 @cindex object formats available
8001 @kindex objdump -i
8002 The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
8003 These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
8004 object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
8005 format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
8006 it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
8007 associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
8008 object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
8009 (@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
8010 list all the formats available for your configuration.
8011
8012 @cindex BFD requirements
8013 @cindex requirements for BFD
8014 As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
8015 several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
8016 BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
8017 formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
8018 been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
8019 BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
8020 may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
8021
8022 One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
8023 mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
8024 useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
8025 conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
8026
8027 @menu
8028 * BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
8029 @end menu
8030
8031 @node BFD outline
8032 @section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
8033 @cindex opening object files
8034 @include bfdsumm.texi
8035 @end ifclear
8036
8037 @node Reporting Bugs
8038 @chapter Reporting Bugs
8039 @cindex bugs in @command{ld}
8040 @cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
8041
8042 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
8043
8044 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
8045 it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
8046 to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
8047 work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
8048 @command{ld}.
8049
8050 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8051 information that enables us to fix the bug.
8052
8053 @menu
8054 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8055 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8056 @end menu
8057
8058 @node Bug Criteria
8059 @section Have You Found a Bug?
8060 @cindex bug criteria
8061
8062 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8063
8064 @itemize @bullet
8065 @cindex fatal signal
8066 @cindex linker crash
8067 @cindex crash of linker
8068 @item
8069 If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
8070 @command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
8071
8072 @cindex error on valid input
8073 @item
8074 If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
8075
8076 @cindex invalid input
8077 @item
8078 If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
8079 may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
8080 object files are correct.
8081
8082 @item
8083 If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
8084 improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
8085 @end itemize
8086
8087 @node Bug Reporting
8088 @section How to Report Bugs
8089 @cindex bug reports
8090 @cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
8091
8092 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
8093 products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
8094 recommend you contact that organization first.
8095
8096 You can find contact information for many support companies and
8097 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8098 distribution.
8099
8100 @ifset BUGURL
8101 Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
8102 @value{BUGURL}.
8103 @end ifset
8104
8105 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8106 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8107 fact or leave it out, state it!
8108
8109 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
8110 problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
8111 assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
8112 matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
8113 the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
8114 location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
8115 were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
8116 into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
8117 specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
8118 and the most helpful.
8119
8120 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8121 the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
8122 on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
8123
8124 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
8125 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8126 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8127 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
8128
8129 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8130
8131 @itemize @bullet
8132 @item
8133 The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
8134 the @samp{--version} argument.
8135
8136 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
8137 the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
8138
8139 @item
8140 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
8141 patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
8142
8143 @item
8144 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8145 version number.
8146
8147 @item
8148 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
8149 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8150
8151 @item
8152 The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
8153 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
8154 list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
8155 sufficient.
8156
8157 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8158 and then we might not encounter the bug.
8159
8160 @item
8161 A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
8162 bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8163 provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8164 bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8165 state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8166 requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8167 we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8168 attachments are best.
8169
8170 If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8171 @code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8172 object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8173 @code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8174 how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8175
8176 @item
8177 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8178 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8179
8180 Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
8181 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8182 not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8183 a chance to make a mistake.
8184
8185 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8186 say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
8187 copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
8188 C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8189 and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8190 fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8191 you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8192 any conclusion from our observations.
8193
8194 @item
8195 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
8196 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8197 @samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
8198 If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
8199 context, not by line number.
8200
8201 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8202 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8203 @end itemize
8204
8205 Here are some things that are not necessary:
8206
8207 @itemize @bullet
8208 @item
8209 A description of the envelope of the bug.
8210
8211 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8212 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8213 changes will not affect it.
8214
8215 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8216 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8217 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8218 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8219
8220 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8221 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8222 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8223 less time, and so on.
8224
8225 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8226 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8227
8228 @item
8229 A patch for the bug.
8230
8231 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8232 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8233 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8234 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8235
8236 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
8237 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8238 through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8239 able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8240 fixed.
8241
8242 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8243 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8244 help us to understand.
8245
8246 @item
8247 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8248
8249 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8250 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8251 @end itemize
8252
8253 @node MRI
8254 @appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8255 @cindex MRI compatibility
8256 To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8257 linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
8258 alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8259 described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8260 simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
8261 @command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
8262 linker commands; these commands are described here.
8263
8264 In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8265 file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8266 features to make use of them.
8267
8268 You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8269 @samp{-c} command-line option.
8270
8271 Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8272 command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8273 blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
8274 MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
8275 issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8276
8277 Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8278
8279 You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8280 lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8281 The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8282
8283 @table @code
8284 @cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8285 @item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8286 @itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8287 Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
8288 the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8289 @code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8290 your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8291 script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8292 commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8293 input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8294 @code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8295
8296 @cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8297 @item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8298 Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8299 in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8300
8301 @var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8302
8303 @cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8304 @item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8305 Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8306 @var{expression} should be a power of two.
8307
8308 @cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8309 @item BASE @var{expression}
8310 Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8311 absolute addresses) in the output file.
8312
8313 @cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8314 @item CHIP @var{expression}
8315 @itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8316 This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8317
8318 @cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8319 @item END
8320 This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8321
8322 @cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8323 @item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8324 Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
8325 language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
8326
8327 @enumerate
8328 @item
8329 S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8330
8331 @item
8332 IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
8333
8334 @item
8335 COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
8336 @samp{COFF}
8337 @end enumerate
8338
8339 @cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8340 @item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8341 Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
8342 @command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
8343
8344 The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8345 same line, with no change in its effect.
8346
8347 @cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8348 @item LOAD @var{filename}
8349 @itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8350 Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
8351 same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
8352 command line.
8353
8354 @cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8355 @item NAME @var{output-name}
8356 @var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
8357 MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8358 option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8359
8360 @cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8361 @item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8362 @itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
8363 Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
8364 order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8365 script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8366 sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8367 file, in the order specified.
8368
8369 @cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8370 @item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8371 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8372 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8373 Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8374 @var{name} used in the linker input files.
8375
8376 @cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8377 @item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8378 @itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8379 @itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8380 You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8381 specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8382 If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8383 @var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8384 @end table
8385
8386 @node GNU Free Documentation License
8387 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
8388 @include fdl.texi
8389
8390 @node LD Index
8391 @unnumbered LD Index
8392
8393 @printindex cp
8394
8395 @tex
8396 % I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
8397 % meantime:
8398 \long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8399 \centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8400 \centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8401 \centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8402 \centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8403 \centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8404 \centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8405 \centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8406 \page\colophon
8407 % Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
8408 @end tex
8409
8410 @bye